Ak 200s

AK 200 S
Service Manual
A better way to better care

AK 200 S · Service Manual
AK 200 S - Service manual
Contents:
Chapter 1 Installation guide
Chapter 2 Maintenance manual
Chapter 3 Replacements
Chapter 4 Service technician’s guide
Chapter 5 Technical description
Chapter 6 Technical data
Chapter 7 Spare parts list
Chapter 8 Wiring diagram
Chapter 9 Symbol description
Chapter 10 Calibration manual
Chapter 11 Electrical safety inspections
Chapter 12 FM flow diagrams

Preface
About this manual requirements; and if the equipment is used in

This service manual provides the information accordance with the published Operator’s
needed to install the AK 200 S monitor and how Manual.
to carry out maintenance and calibrations.
It is a guidance how to identify and repair
faults that may occur.
Maintenance
To ensure proper operation of the AK 200 S,
a qualified service technician must perform a
Installation complete series of maintenance procedures at
Installation of the machine should be done in regular intervals.
accordance with the recommended procedures
in the Installation Guide. The maintenance and calibration information
that you need to use is provided in this Service
When installing a new monitor kindly Manual.
remember to fill out the Installation / Out of
Box report and return it to: It is mandatory to perform at least a preventive
maintenance every second year. A yearly
Gambro Lundia AB maintenance is recommended. The rate of
Monitor Division preventive maintenance might be different due
Magistratsvägen 16 to variations of the operating environment.
PO Box 10101
SE-220 10 Lund
Sweden
Competence of Service Engineers
There is a certain minimum level of competence
This is an important information and it will required for Service Engineers who are to
assist us to improve the product for you. The maintain and repair Gambro products,
Out of Box system is not valid for products, summarized as follows.
components or printed circuit boards that isn't
in its original delivered condition. A Service Engineer is considered suitable
qualified if he/she has:
Complaint 1. Practical experience of the AK 200 S

If a complaint is raised it shall be monitor.
communicated to the relevant Gambro Sales
Company. In order for the Sales Company to be 2. Attended AK 200 S technical service course
able to determine the relevance of a complaint, and has been given a certificate stating that
it is of vital importance that the deviation is the technician has passed the course.
communicated to them as comprehensive as the
issue requires. 3. Access to the recommended test equipment
Complaints are important information and it and special tools detailed in this Service
will assist Gambro to improve the product for Manual.
you. The Complaint system is not valid for
products, components or printed circuit boards 4. Access to the recommended spare parts, see
that isn't in its original delivered condition. section Spare Parts List.
Disclaimer 5. Access to and understanding of the

The manufacturer accepts responsibility for the AK 200 S Operator's Manual, HCEN9751.
safety, reliability, and performance of this
equipment only if installation, operational In general, this policy implies that training will
procedures, maintenance, calibrations, and be carried out by Gambro Lundia AB: Monitor
repairs are carried out by appropriately trained Division, while local markets are responsible for
and suitable qualified people; if all their own service organization.
equipment modifications are authorized in
writing by the manufacturer and carried out by
appropriately trained and suitable qualified
people; if the electrical installation of the
relevant room complies with all applicable local
electrical codes and, if applicable, IEC
Repair
Parts which are sent for repair shall be sent to
the following address:
Gambro Lundia AB
Monitor Division
Workshop
Magistratsvägen 16
PO Box 10101
SE-220 10 Lund
Sweden
Technical support
For technical support please contact your local
Gambro Service representative.
Valid revision
Publication no. Denomination

HCEN9281, Rev. 05.2006 Service Manual
The complete AK 200 S Service Manual,

HCEN9281, consists of the following separate
chapters:
HCEN9282 Rev. 07. 2005 Installation Guide

HCEN12088 Rev. 05. 2006 Maintenance Manual
HCEN9284 Rev. 05. 2006 Replacements
HCEN9285 Rev. 05. 2006 Service Tech. Guide
HCEN9286 Rev. 02. 2003 Technical Description
HCEN9287 Rev. 02. 2006 Technical Data
HCEN9288 Rev. 06. 2005 Spare Parts List
K20595 CO 23309 Wiring Diagrams, BM
K20583 CO 23309 Wiring Diagrams, FM
HCEN9289 Rev. 02. 2006 Symbol description
HCEN12089 Rev. 07. 2004 Calibration
HCEN12190 Rev. 05. 2006 Electrical safety
inspections
HCEN10398 Rev. 05. 2006 FM flow diagram,
AK 200 S
AK 200 S UFD
AK 200 ULTRA S
All rights reserved.

© Copyright Gambro Lundia AB, Sweden, 2001
Gambro Lundia AB
Monitor Division
Box 10101
SE-220 10 Lund
Sweden
Tel: +46 46 16 90 00
Fax: +46 46 16 96 96
www.gambro.com
This page is intentionally left blank
Installation Guide
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S
July 2005
Installation Guide
Installation Guide
General
Unpacking and inspection ............................... 1:2
Environment and Physical Data ..................... 1:2
Operating Environment .................................. 1:2
Transport and Storage Environment ............. 1:2
Physical Data ................................................... 1:2
Mains Voltage and Power Consumption ......... 1:3
Power Supply ................................................... 1:3
Earth leakage current ..................................... 1:3
Patient leakage current .................................. 1:3
Fuses ............................................................... 1:3
Service Outlets ................................................ 1:3
Line Fuses ....................................................... 1:3
Mains Water Supply ........................................ 1:3
Tools ................................................................ 1:4
Battery ............................................................. 1:4
Back-up Battery ............................................... 1:4
Monitor Stand
Assembling the Monitor Stand ....................... 1:5
MS 200 - Adj. hight: five fixed positions ......... 1:6
MS 200 - Adj. for installation of WRO 300 .... 1:10
MS 202 - Adj. hight: continuous variable...... 1:15
Positioning the dialysis machine

on the stand ..................................... 1:20
Installation instructions for AK 200 S

Dialysis fluid filter holder ............................. 1:21
pH-sensor ....................................................... 1:21
Dialyser connector set, blue and red ............ 1:22
Pressure regulator ........................................ 1:23
Infusion stand and service handle ................ 1:23
BM - 9V battery ............................................. 1:24
Connection of hoses ...................................... 1:24
Power supply ................................................. 1:26
Connection of external equipment ............... 1:26
Installation instructions for AK 200 ULTRA S

Dialysis fluid filter holder ............................. 1:27
pH-sensor ....................................................... 1:27
Dialyser connector set, blue and red ............ 1:28
Pressure regulator ........................................ 1:29
Infusion stand and service handle ................ 1:29
BM - 9V battery ............................................. 1:30
Connection of hoses ...................................... 1:30
Power supply ................................................. 1:32
Connection of external equipment ............... 1:32
Start-up Procedure
Start-up Procedure ........................................ 1:33
Functional check - Fch .................................. 1:33
Checklist ........................................................ 1:35
AK 200 S & AK 200 ULTRA S Installation Guide 1:1
HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide
Unpacking and inspection Environment and Physical

When unpacking, the equipment should be checked. If
the equipment is in any way damaged, proper opera-
Data
tion cannot be guaranteed. Please contact your The AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S can be in-
Gambro Service representative. stalled in most environments provided that
certain conditions regarding temperature,
The packages contain the units and components relative humidity, mains voltage etc. are met.
shown in figure.
Operating Environment
pH-kit Ambient temperature: +18 °C to + 35 °C

Relative humidity: 15 % - 85 %
Filterholder Air pressure: 700 - 1060 hPa
Transport and Storage Environment

Units being transported or stored must be kept
in their original packaging. Units must be
handled en route in accordance with special
instructions. Units can be transported or stored
in the following environment up to 15 weeks:
Ambient temperature: -20 °C to +70 °C

Relative humidity: 10 % - 96 %
Air pressure: 500 - 1060 hPa
Note: During transportation and storage the

equipment has to be kept in its original packing.
If transportation or storage time is more than 15
weeks, the environmental data relating to the
operation has to be followed.
If condensation occur when moving the equip-
ment between locations with different tempera-
tures and high relative humidity ( e.g. outdoor
and indoor locations ), the inside of the equip-
ment shall be allowed to dry before switching on
Tubes the equipment.
Dialyzerholder Physical Data

Pressure regulator
Additional package Depth 610 mm
Width 570 mm
Total Height:
fig. Units and Components Five position stand: 1152 - 1382 mm
Adjustable heights 1175-1340mm
Ensure that the specified equipment has been
delivered. Do the packages contain the specified Floor Area 573 x 753 mm
monitors and options? Are there any units/
components missing? Compare the delivered Weight Blood Monitor 15 - 17 kg
equipment with the figure above. Weight Fluid Monitor 40 kg
If in doubt, please contact your Gambro Service Weight Stand 24 - 31 kg
representative.
Infusion Stand
Ensure that the voltage specified on the voltage Height 1300 - 2150 mm
tag matches the mains voltage. If in doubt, please Max. load 10 kg
contact your Gambro Service representative.
1:2 AK 200 S & AK 200 ULTRA S Installation Guide

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide
Mains Voltage and Power Mains Water Supply

Consumption Inlet Water Quality
The AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S must be Inlet water quality must comply with local
plugged into a grounded power socket, not more regulations and if no such regulation is
than 3.0 metres distant. available follow ISO 13959. Level for
conductivity shall not exceed 0.1 mS/cm.
Note! The 115 V-version require two grounded It is possible to use water with higher
power sockets within 3.0 metres. conductivity if it consists mainly of sodium
salts. This may however affect the accuracy
Power Supply of the fluid composition.
Mains Voltage 115, 230 V AC (±10 %)
Frequency 50-60Hz (± 5 Hz) See chapter “Technical data and specifications/
Water supply” in this manual for more details.
Power Consumptions Max. 2250 W at 230V
Max. 1650 W at 115V Water supply flow rate
for AK 200 S
Cable: 3 conductor cable - Treatment: 300 to 750 ml/min
Length max. 3 m rating 250 V 10A - Disinfection: 0 to 1150 ml/min
Connector: Certified to IEC 320/ for AK 200 ULTRA S

C13. - Treatment: 450 to 850 ml/min
- Disinfection: 0 to 900 ml/min
Mains plug: Earthed plug,
250VAC / 10 -16 A Feed water pressure:
approved or Hospital To regulator: 120 - 800 kPa
grade, earthed plug, To machine: 85-120 kPa
125 VAC /15A,
approved.
Note! If a high frequent noise appears from the
pressure regulator, do a small adjustment of it
Earth leakage current up or down. ( 85 - 120 kPa)
max 500 µA, typical <100 µA (115V)
max 500 µA, typical <145 µA (230V) Feed water temperature:
Treatment: +5 to +30 °C
Patient leakage current Disinfection: +5 to +90 °C
max 100 µA, typical <10 µA (115V)
max 100 µA, typical <10 µA (230V) Drain:
If the optional air-gap on the machine is used
Note! All leakage currents are specified without
the distance between the air-gap and the drain
external equipment connected to the machine.
must not be less than 0.3 m.
For an electrically adjustable stand in its lowest
Fuses position this means that the drain must not be
2 x T12 A. higher than 580 mm.
For a mechanically adjustable stand in its lowest
Service Outlets position the drain must not be higher than
One extra grounded power socket should be 550 mm.
available close to the dialysis machine for trou-
bleshooting (PC-logging) and maintenance Drain outlet: max. 1.2 m above floor
purposes. Drain (lenght of tube) : max. 5 m
Drain capacity : min. 1.0 l/min.
Line Fuses
Never overload the line fuses and do not supply Note! Local ordinances may require the use of
too many systems via a single line fuse. special measures to protect against the
possibility of back-siphonage from dialysis
equipment into the water supply. An air gap to
atmospheric pressure must always be arranged
at the tube outlet. The drain tube should not
exceed 5 meters in length.
HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide
Tools Back-up Battery

Recommended tools needed for installation of The installation and replacement of the back-up
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S: battery on the monitor stand must be done
according to this electrical diagram.
- Phillips screwdrivers:
PH 2, length 100 mm Both lead acid batteries must be changed at the
PH 2, length 250 mm same time and only batteries approved or
- Flat screwdriver: supplied by Gambro Lundia AB may be used.
1x5.5 length 175 mm
- Hexagon socket wrench Changed batteries must be recycled or disposed
(e.g. flex-headed spanners HEX, Metric) of properly.
7 mm
13 mm NOTE! This battery must be connected during
17mm installation. Follow the assembling instructions
- Set of hexagon head keys for the monitor stand, page 1:8, 1:12 or 1:16-
- Cutting pliers 1:17.
- Tube cutter, e.g. 113500084
Batteries
9V Battery
The rechargeable 9 V battery, mounted inside
the blood monitor, is used to drive the buzzer
alarm during main's power failure. The battery
is not connected at delivery.
NOTE! This battery must be connected during

the installation. More information is available
on page 1:24 or 1:30.
A discharged battery will be charged with maxi-

mum 12 mA and it must be charged for at least Fuse: T15 A
50 hours to get completely charged. An all-up Running time: 15 minutes
charged battery will receive a maintaining
current of approximately 1,5 mA. The charge indicator on the power supply is lit
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S charges the battery when the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S is
as long as the AC/DC converter is switched on, equipped with the back-up battery. The machine
i.e. AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S itself does not must be connected to mains voltage and the
need to be switched on. mains switch must be on.
The battery is tested during every functional In a mains failure situation following attention
check to ensure that the capacity is enough in will be given.
the battery, otherwise an attention will be
given: POWER FAILURE BATTERY OPERATION
Batteri operated for x minutes
BATTERY FAILURE
Change/recharge battery Before the battery is empty following attention
will be given.
Warning! LOW BATTERY

Jumper J11 on the BM CPU board must be Machine will switch off in one minute
mounted for the rechargeable battery.
If use of an alkaline non-rechargeable battery,
jumper J11 must be removed, if not, the battery
will be damaged.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide
Assembling the Monitor Stand
The monitor stand MS 200 or MS 202 • Infusion stand holders.

is partly preassembled at delivery.
The items to be mounted during installation are: • Pressure regulator.
• Lower frame, cover, pillar and upper frame, • Rear handle bar.
battery back-up and transformer.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide MS 200 - five fixed positions

MS 200 - Adjustable height: five fixed positions
Step 1
Description:
3 1. Place the lower frame of the stand upside-

down.
2. Attach the grounding sign beside the earth

screw.
2
3. Assemble the earth cable to the earth screw.
4 4. Thread both the earth cable and the battery

cable through the cable entry of the lower
frame.
Note!
This can also be done after that the lower frame
has been fastened (Step 4, Item 1).
3 Step 2
Description:
Silicone
1. Adjust the height of the MS 200. Select the

desired position by using the height adjust-
ment screws.
MS 200 can be adjusted in five different

positions: total height including the AK-
monitor is 1152 to 1382 mm.
2. Turn the pillar (stand leg) upside-down.

1
3. Put a thin string silicone on the lower edge of
the pillar. Remove all unwanted silicone with
a cloth.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
MS 200 - five fixed positions Installation Guide
Step 3
Description:
1. Place the lower frame (cover included) on the

pillar.
1
Note!
- Be careful to match the parts exactly to get
the correct passing at once (due to the
silicone).
- Be careful not to damage the earth cable and
the battery cable when placing the parts
together.
Step 4
Description:
1. Fasten the lower frame (cover included) to

the pillar with 4 hex-head screws
(100382030), with a hexagon socket wrench.
2
2. Assemble the holder for the infusion pole
with 2 screws (100388812).
1 3
3. Assemble the PC-connector with 2 screws
(100370410).
Note!
Before mounting the PC-connector, remove
two pins.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide MS 200 - five fixed positions
Step 5
Description:
1. Assemble the battery-backup kit (K18652001)

to the lower frame of the stand with 2 screws
(100388410).
1
2. Connect the battery cable to the battery
backup.
3. Strap the battery cable to the bar.

3
Step 6
Description:
2
5 cm screw.
1
4 2. Assemble the earth cable to the earth screw.
3
3. Separate the rubber casing on the battery
cable (5 cm) and put it in the opening of the
upper edge.
4. Insert the sealing grommet in the opening of

the short side upper edge.
(It is used for the power supply cord to the
electrically adjustable stand, MS 202)

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
MS 200 - five fixed positions Installation Guide
Step 7
Description:
1
1. Fasten the upper frame to the pillar with 4
screws (100389903).
2 2. Fasten the bracket for the dialysis fluid filter

holder and pre water filter holder. Use 4
screws (100388510).
Step 8
Description:
The right filter holder is used for dialysis

fluid filters.
The left filter holder is used for Water-

filters (AK 200 ULTRA S only).
2
1 1. Fasten the right filter holder with 3 screws
(100378530).
AK 200 ULTRA S only:

2. Fasten the left holder with 3 screws
(100378530).

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide MS 200 - for WRO 300

MS 200 - Adjusted for installation of WRO 300
Step 1
Description:
1. Place the lower frame of the stand

upside-down.

screw.
4. Thread both the earth cable and the battery

cable through the cable entry of the lower
frame.
5. Loosen the four screws and remove the

battery holder, according to the illustration.
Step 2
Description:
3 Silicone 1. Adjust the height of the MS 200. When using

AK 200 S together with WRO 300 it is recom-
mended to use the second highest position to
avoid the tubes being squeezed.
Select the desired position by using the
height adjustment screws.

a cloth.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
MS 200 - for WRO 300 Installation Guide
Step 3
Description:

pillar.
Note!
the correct passing at once (due to the sili-
cone).
together.
Step 4
Description:
2
3 (100382030), with a hexagon socket wrench.
1 2. Assemble the holder for the infusion pole

with 2 screws (100388812).

(100370410).
Note!
Before mounting the PC-connector, remove two
pins.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Step 5
Description:
Fuse
1. Move the backup-batteries (1a)* from the
holder included in the battery-backup kit
(K18652001) to the battery holder adjusted
for WRO 300 (1b) according to the illustra-
2 tion.
* including cables, fuse-holder, contact for the

1a battery-cable and printed circuit board
Note! Do not disconnect the cables from the

batteries, fuse-holder or the contact.
3 2. Mount the contact for the battery-cable and

the fuse-holder to the battery-holder .
1b 3. Fasten the printed circuit board to the

battery-holder with the adhesive quick lock.
Note! The electrical installation of the back-up

batteries must remain according to the diagram
2 on the battery-holder.
Step 6
1 Description:
1. Assemble the complete battery holder

(including batteries, cables, fuse-holder,
contact for the battery-cable and printed
circuit board) to the lower frame of the stand
with 4 screws (100388510).

backup.
3. Strap the battery cable to the bar.

FU S E
!
a nl
veicr e M ua
P C B
C ont
ya tte r
X 1V2)
R ed
B la kc
: 2 A h
L e a d A c id B
Vo lta g e2:4V (2
H a n d linsge: e S
6 -1
C a p a c ity
+
-
+
-
2
F use
3
1

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
MS 200 - for WRO 300 Installation Guide
Step 7
Description:
2 1. Attach the grounding sign beside the earth

5 cm screw.

3 3. Separate the rubber casing on the battery
4 upper edge.
4. Insert the sealing grommet in the opening of

the short side upper edge.
(It is used for the power supply cord to the
electrically adjustable stand, MS 202)
Step 8
Description:

screws (100389903).
2. Fasten the bracket for the dialysis fluid filter

holder and pre-water filter holder.
Use 4 screws (100388510) and 4 washers
100392905.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Step 9
Description:
The right filter holder is used for dialysis fluid

filters.
The left filter holder is used for Water-filters

(AK 200 ULTRA S only).
1. Fasten the right filter holder with 3 screws

(100378530).

(100378530).
Step 10
Description:
1. Place the WRO 300 / WRO 300 H monitor

on the bottom of the stand according to the
illustration.
2. Mount the tilt protection bar (K23902A) in

the two holes according to the illustration.
Note! Use the adaption kit (K2395501) to

connect the WRO 300/WRO 300 H monitor to
the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S.
1 Assembling instructions are included in the
kit.
2

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
MS 202 - adjustable height Installation Guide
Assembling the Monitor Stand MS 202:

Adjustable height: continuous variable
Step 1
Description:
1. Place the lower frame of the stand

upside-down.
2. Insert and rotate the lift control kit by lifting

4 the lower frame.
2 3. Attach the grounding sign beside the earth
screw.
5. Thread both the earth cable and the battery

5 cable through the cable entry of the lower
frame.
Note!
This can also be done after that the lower
frame has been fastened (Step 4, Item 1).
3 Step 2
Description:
Silicone
2 2. Place the contact in the carrier.

a cloth.
Note!
MS 202 is variable adjustable in height.
Total height including the AK-monitor is
1175 to 1340 mm.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide MS 202 - adjustable height
Step 3
Description:

1 pillar.
Note!
the correct passing at once (due to the sili-
cone).
together.
Step 4
Description:

4
3 (100382030), with a hexagon socket wrench.
2. Connect the motor cable to the lift control

2
1 kit.
5 3. Connect the power cable from the lift control

kit to the battery-backup.
4. Connect the remote control cable to the the

lift control kit.
5. Assemble screw (100388045) and locking nut

(100316260).
Note!
Adjust the stand up and down until the screw
can be inserted.
(cont.)

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Step 4
Description:
(cont.)

10 9 (100 370 410).
6 7 Note!
Before mounting the PC-connector, remove
two pins.
7. Assemble the holder for the infusion pole

with 2 screws (100 388 812).
8. Raise the pillar 20 cm.
9. Remove the remote control cable from the lift

control kit.
8
10.Remove the power cable from the battery
backup.
Step 5
Description:
1. Assemble the battery-backup kit (K18652001)

1 to the lower frame of the stand with 2 screws
(100388410).

backup and strap the cable to the bar.
2 3. Strap the power cable and the two battery

cables to the bar.
3 4. Strap the motor cable and the power cable.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide MS 202 - adjustable height
Step 6
Description:
1
5 cm 1. Lower the stand by removing the 4 screws

(100389903).
4
2 Note!
Hold the stand when removing the last
screw.

3 screw.

5
4. Separate the rubber casing on the battery
upper edge.
5. Lead the remote control cable through the

stand and through the bottom hole.
(cont.)
Step 6
Description:
9
(cont.)
6. Attach the remote control cable to the lift

control kit.
8
7. Cut the sealing grommet apart and grease it

6 with spirits.
8. Insert the sealing grommet and the remote

control cable in the opening of the short side
upper edge and stretch the cable according to
the maximum height of the stand.
9. Lower the pillar with the remote control.
WARNING!
Beware of the movement/rotation and the sharp
edges of the pillar.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Step 7
Description:
1
screws (100389903).
3
2. Raise the stand 20 cm with the remote
control.
3. Fasten the bracket for the dialysis fluid filter

holder and pre water filter holder. Use 4
screws (100388510).
2
Step 8
Description:
The right filter holder is used for

dialysis fluid filters.
The left filter holder is used for pre-water filters

(AK 200 ULTRA S only).
2
1 1. Fasten the right filter holder with 3 screws
(100378530).

(100378530).

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide Positioning the dialysis machine on the stand
Positioning the dialysis

machine on the stand
• Place the dialysis machine on the stand. • Connect the earth cable from the fluid
• Observe that the plugged tubes from • Cover the dialysis machine with the fluid
the fluid monitor at the bottom of the protective tray.
machine fits into the holes in the stand
• Fix the fluid monitor with four screws.
• Connect the earth cable from the fluid

monitor and mount the washers and nut.
See figure below.
fig. liftpoint (package)
fig. liftpoint (machine) fig.connecting earthcable

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation of AK 200 S Installation Guide
Installation instructions Step 1

Description: dialysis fluid filter holder
for AK 200 S (Only for AK 200 S machines with UFD-kit)
1. Attach angled connectors to the tubes

coming from the fluid unit.
Attach angled connectors to the dialysis fluid

filter holder.
2
2
1 Connect tube 132, 133 and 134 from the
dialysis fluid-filter holder to the tubes
coming from the fluid unit, according to
1 these figures.
Tube 132
Tube 133
1 1 Tube 134
AK 200 S
Dialys fluid filter

2. Strap the tubes.
3. Insert a new ultrafilter into the dialysis fluid

filter holder according to instructions in the
AK 200 S Operator's Manual.
Step 2
Description: pH-sensor
1. If a pH-sensor is to be installed, remove the

pH dummy and insert the pH-sensor.
Note!
pH-sensor calibration
If the AK 200 S is equipped with the pH-sensor
option, this must be calibrated during installa-
tion.
Information about the calibration is available in
the AK 200 S Service Manual, chapter Calibra-
tions.
It is important that the pH-sensor is calibrated

when the dialysis machine is installed, since the
delivered pH-meter has not been calibrated
with the actual AK 200 S.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide Installation of AK 200 S
Step 3
Description: Dialyser connector set, blue
1. Connect a sample port for 6 mm tubes

(K20219002) to the dialyser connector set
(blue) with clamps (Ø 12 mm).
5
2. Warm-up the end of the dialysis connector
set tube (blue).
4 5
3. Attach a locking ring on the tube 5 mm from
5 mm the end.
3
4. Fasten it to the machine according to the
figure.
5. Fasten the blue safety coupling to the right

coupling on the machine.
Step 3 cont.
Description: Dialyser connector set, red
1. Warm-up the end of the dialysis connector set

tube (red).
4
the end.
3 3. Fasten it to the machine according to the
figure.
4. Fasten the red safety coupling to the left

5 mm coupling on the machine.
2

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Step 4
Description: Pressure regulator
2
1. Assemble the pressure regulator (100313255)
1
to the upper holder for the infusion pole
2. Fasten the upper holder for the infusion pole

with two screws (100389903).
Step 5
Description: Infusion stand and service handle
1. Fasten the infusion stand and the mast top

with a screw (100382816).
2. Fasten the service handle.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Step 7
Description: BM - 9V battery
The rechargeable 9V battery inside the BM

monitor must be connected during the installa-
tion.
1. Connect the battery-cable to connector P51

on the BM CPU board.
Warning!
Jumper J11 on the BM CPU board must be

will be damaged.
Step 8
Description: Connection of hoses
Connect following hoses according to the figure

on the next page:
1. Connect the inlet water hose (no. 1) to the

pressure regulator.
2. Connect hose no. 2 from the pressure regu-

lator to the non-return valve.
3. Connect hose no. 3 from the non-return

valve to the inlet water nipple.
4. Connect hose no. 4 from the drain nipple to

the drain.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Item Denomination Order no. Clamp
1 Reinforced PVC tube K0 3343A 100 334 217

4 Reinforced silicon tube 8x3.5mm 100 312 094 100 334 217

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Step 9
Description: Power supply
1. Connect the machine to a grounded power
socket, not more than 3.0 metres in distant.
Note!
The 115 V-version require two grounded power
sockets within 3.0 metres.
Warning!
The mains power cable from the AK 200 S must
Mains voltage, 115 V be plugged into a socket with Protected Earth
(PE) to avoid risk of electrical shock.
Mains voltage, 230 V
Step 10
Description: Connection of external equipment
P79 Four colourmarked connection points are

P63 provided on the rear of the machine:
P76 Yellow: Relay interface P79

P64 Black: GSS / PC connection and P63
Program Load interface
Blue: UF-cell calibration interface P76
Grey: Not used yet P64

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation of AK 200 ULTRA S Installation Guide
Installation instructions Step 1

Description: dialysis fluid filter holder
for AK 200 ULTRA S
1. Attach angled connectors to the tubes
coming from the fluid unit.
Attach angled connectors to the dialysis fluid

filter holder.
2 Connect tube 132, 133 and 134 from the

2
1 dialysis fluid-filter holder to the tubes
coming from the fluid unit, according to
these figures.
1 Tube 134
Tube 133
Tube 132
1 1
AK 200 S
Dialys fluid filter

2. Strap the tubes.
3. Insert a new ultrafilter into the dialysis fluid

filter holder according to instructions in the
AK 200 ULTRA S Operator's Manual.
Step 2
Description: pH-sensor
1. If a pH-sensor is to be installed, remove the

pH dummy and insert the pH-sensor.
Note!
If the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S is equipped
with the pH-sensor option, this must be cali-
brated during installation.
Information about the calibration is available in
the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S Service
Manual, chapter Calibrations.
It is important that the pH-sensor is calibrated

when the dialysis machine is installed, since the
delivered pH-meter has not been calibrated
with the actual AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide Installation of AK 200 ULTRA S
Step 3
Description: Dialyser connector set, blue
1. Connect a sample port for 6 mm tubes

(K20219002) to the dialyser connector set
(blue) with clamps (Ø 12 mm).
5
2. Warm-up the end of the dialysis connector
set tube (blue).
4 5
5 mm
3 the end.
4. Fasten it to the machine according to the

figure.
5. Fasten the blue safety coupling to the right

Step 3 cont.
Description: Dialyser connector set, red
1. Warm-up the end of the dialysis connector set

tube (red).
4
the end.
3 3. Fasten it to the machine according to the

figure.
4. Fasten the red safety coupling to the left

5 mm
2

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Step 4
Description: Pressure regulator
2
1. Assemble the pressure regulator (100313255)
1
to the upper holder for the infusion pole
2. Fasten the upper holder for the infusion pole

with two screws (100389903).
Step 5
Description: Infusion stand and service handle
1. Fasten the infusion stand and the mast top

with a screw (100382816).
2. Fasten the service handle.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Step 7
Description: BM - 9V battery
The rechargeable 9V battery inside the BM

monitor must be connected during the installa-
tion.
1. Connect the battery-cable to connector P51

on the BM CPU board.
Warning!
Jumper J11 on the BM CPU board must be

will be damaged.
Step 8
Description: Connection of hoses and Water-
filter
Connect following hoses according to the figure

on the next page:
1. Connect the inlet water hose (no.1) to the

pressure regulator.
2. Connect hose no.2 from the pressure regula-

tor to the non-return valve.
3. Connect hose no.3 from the non-return valve

to the inlet water nipple.
4. Connect the hoses no.4 to the Water-filter

from the upper left nipple.
5. Connect hose no.5 from the Water-filter to

the upper right nipple.
6. Connect hose no.6 from the drain port of the

Water-filter to the drain.
7. Connect hose no.7 from the drain nipple to

the drain.
8. Insert a new ultrafilter into the Water-filter

holder according to instructions in the
AK 200 ULTRA S Operator's Manual.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
AK 200 S
Dialys fluid filter
U-FILTER U-FILTER
Airgap / Drain
Water filter
Item Denomination Order no. Clamp

8 Ultrafilter U8000

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Step 9
Description: Power supply
1. Connect the machine to a grounded power
socket, not more than 3.0 metres in distant.
Note!
The 115 V-version require two grounded power
sockets within 3.0 metres.
Warning!
The mains power cable from the AK 200 ULTRA S
Mains voltage, 115 V must be plugged into a socket with Protected
Earth (PE) to avoid risk of electrical shock.
Mains voltage, 230 V
Step 10
Description: Connection of external equipment
P79 Four colourmarked connection points are

P63 provided on the rear of the machine:
P76 Yellow: Relay interface P79

P64 Black: GSS / PC connection and P63
Program Load interface
Blue: UF-cell calibration interface P76
Grey: Not used yet P64

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide
Start-up Procedure
The main switch on the power supply should
always be in ON position, even when the
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S is not in use. This
“Stand by” mode is indicated by a lit segment on
the TIME display on the operators panel.
h.min
Time
The ON/OFF button on the Operators Panel is

used to turn the machine on and off.
Press for at least 3 seconds to switch the

ON
OFF
machine on or off.
For further information about operating instruc-

tions, please see the Operator's Manual.
If the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S is equipped
with the pH-sensor option, this must be cali-
brated during installation. How to do, please see
the Service Manual, chapter Calibrations, pH
sensor calibration.
NOTE! It is important that the pH-sensor is

calibrated when the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S
is installed, since the delivered pH- meter has
not been calibrated with the actual machine.
Functional check - Fch

Each time the ON/OFF button is pressed, the
functional check is carried out.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide
Checklist - Check if applicable

Yes Unpacking and inspection Positioning the Dialysis Machine
Ensure that the specified equipment
on the Stand
has been delivered.
Place the AK 200 S on the stand.
Check that the additional package box
Fix the fluid monitor.
contains the specified components.
Connect the earth cable.
Check, by visual inspection, that the
machine shows no sign of damage.
Ensure that the top tray is placed at the
top of the machine.
Environment and Physical Data
Ensure that the Operating Environment
Installation of AK 200 S
is according to the specifications.
Step 1 Step 5 Step 9
Monitor Stand Step 2 Step 6 Step 10
Ensure that the Monitor Stand is
assembled correctly according to the Step 3 Step 7
instructions for MS 200, MS 200-WRO 300
or MS 202. Step 4 Step 8
MS 200 MS 200 MS 202

Installation of AK 200 ULTRA S
Checklist - filed by the Service Engi-
(WRO 300)
neer responsible for the installation.
Step 1 Step 1 Step 1 Step 1 Step 5 Step 9
Step 2 Step 2 Step 2 Step 2 Step 6 Step 10
Step 3 Step 3 Step 3 Step 3 Step 7
Step 4 Step 4 Step 4 Step 4 Step 8
Step 5 Step 5 Step 5 Start-up procedure

Ensure that the recommended start- up
Step 6 Step 6 Step 6 procedure is followed.
Step 7 Step 7 Step 7 Out of box report

Fill out the Installation / Out of Box report and
Step 8 Step 8 Step 8 return it to:
Step 9 Gambro Lundia AB

Monitor Division
Step 10 Magistratsvägen 16
PO Box 10101
SE-220 10 Lund
Sweden
Note! If you have any remarks during installa-

tion, please contact your Gambro Service
representative.
This record is to be signed and filed by the Service Engineer responsible for the installation.
Date............................Signature........................................................................
Serial number: FM: ............................... BM: ...............................

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
Installation Guide
Checklist - filed by the Service Engineer

responsible for the installation.

HCEN9282 Rev. 07.2005
HCEN9282 © Gambro Lundia AB,2001. Revision July 2005
Gambro Lundia AB, Monitor Division

Box 10101
SE-220 10 Lund
Sweden
Tel:+46 46 16 90 00
Fax:+46 46 16 96 96
www.gambro.com
front_rearAK200Smaint_en_4.pdf 2004-09-13 11:38:04
Maintenance Manual
05.2006
CM
MY
CY
CMY
GAMBRO
Maintenance Manual
Preventive maintenance procedures for

General ........................................................... 2:2
Test equipment ............................................. 2:3
Preventive Maintenance: Base-kit............ 2:4

Parts ................................................................ 2:4
How to exchange the parts included
in the Base-kit ................................................. 2:5
Actions to carry out after the parts
have been exchanged ...................................... 2:8
Preventive Maintenance: A-kit ............... 2:23

Parts .............................................................. 2:23
How to exchange the exterior parts
included in the A-kit ...................................... 2:24
Actions to carry out after the parts have
been exchanged ............................................. 2:25
Preventive Maintenance: B-kit ............... 2:26

Parts .............................................................. 2:26
How to exchange the parts included
in the B-kit .................................................... 2:27
been exchanged ............................................. 2:29
AK 200 S /AK 200 ULTRA S HCEN12088 Rev. 05. 2006 2:1

Maintenance Manual
General
To ensure proper operation of the AK 200 S / To fulfill the preventive maintenance procedures
AK 200 ULTRA S, a qualified service technician for AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S some parts must
must perform a complete series of preventive be exchanged. The necessary parts to be ex-
maintenance procedures at regular intervals. changed are available in a Base-kit and two
The maintenance and calibration information complementary kits:
that you need to use is provided in this manual.
• Base-kit (K40165001)
The preventive maintenance procedures have
been devised to require a minimum of time while • A-kit (K40166001): Includes exterior parts
ensuring that the machine is maintained in
optimum operation condition. • B-kit (K40167001): Overhauling service-kit
Included in the preventive maintenance proce- When performing preventive maintenance

dures are checks to verify normal machine procedures or calibrations, which require access
operation. Should the machine fail to pass any of to the interior of the machine, you must have
these tests, repair or calibration might be proper electrostatic safety devices (i.e. wrist
needed, then repeat the tests until the specifica- grounding straps or grounding mats) in place to
tions are met. prevent damage to electrostatic sensitive compo-
nents within the machine.
It is mandatory to perform at least a preventive
maintenance every second year.
A yearly maintenance is recommended. The rate

of preventive maintenance might be different
due to variations of the operating environment.
The AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S will perform as

designed only if it is used and maintained in During repair of any of the parts in the flow
accordance with Gambro’s instructions. path, special care should be taken and a good
Any warranties made by Gambro with respect to hygiene should be kept.
the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S are void if the
equipment is not used in accordance with the Note! After maintenance a disinfection program
instructions provided. Gambro will not accept must be performed before a treatment is per-
responsibility for any damage or injury resulting formed.
from improper use or maintenance or unauthor-
ized repair. Checklists are provided in the Spare Parts
Instruction that is included in the maintenance-
kits. The purpose of these checklists is to record
the work done.
2:2 AK 200 S /AK 200 ULTRA S HCEN12088 Rev. 05. 2006

Maintenance Manual
Test equipment
Test equipment needed to perform maintenance
Test equipment: Tolerance: Manufacturer: Gambro Order

number:
Conductivity measurement ± 0.1 mS/cm MESA, IBP
Pressure measurement ± 2mmHg to ± 200mmHg MESA, IBP, Druck
± 1% beyond ± 200mmHg
If BPM is installed:
± 0.8mmHg
Temperature measurement: ± 0.2ºC MESA, IBP
Digital Voltmeter ± 0.5% Fluke
Measuring glass ± 5 ml
Blood leak Calibration N/A Gambro K40169001
Cover
Gauge pin kit for blood pump rollers T = 1.1 (Stop pin = 1.1*2*0.7 = 1.5mm) Gambro K40158001
(including three different pins) T = 1.6 (Stop pin = 1.6*2*0.7 = 2.2mm)
T = 2.0 (Stop pin = 2.0*2*0.7 = 2.8mm)
T = wall thickness of the blood tubing

Gauge pin kit for blood pump rollers T = 1.1 (Stop pin = 1.1*2*0.7 = 1.5mm) Gambro K40158002
(to be ordered separately) T = 1.6 (Stop pin = 1.6*2*0.7 = 2.2mm) K40158003
T = 2.0 (Stop pin = 2.0*2*0.7 = 2.8mm) K40158004

Calibration tube kit N/A Gambro K13983002
Drip chamber N/A
Tube for calibration of N/A
priming detector
Safety tester According to IEC 60601-1 Rigel, Biotec, Metron
*BPM test equipment N/A Gambro K22151001
*BPM Cuff N/A Gambro 100900141
*pH buffers ± 0.07 pH units pH 7 – 100810001
pH 9 – 100810002
BVS test tool Gambro K22281001
Magnet for blood pump cover Gambro K19049001
* If installed

Maintenance Manual Base-kit
Preventive Maintenance: Base-kit
Parts
The Base-kit (K40165001) includes all parts
necessary to fulfill the mandatory preventive
maintenance procedures for AK 200 S /
AK 200 ULTRA S.
Step Monitor Denomination Part no. Qty

2, 3 BM/FM Air filter K11503001 3
4 AC/DC Air filter K18891001 1
O-ring for BiCart- and SelectCart holder,
5, 6 FM 100319008 4
upper and lower.
7 FM O-ring for ultrafilter holders 100319029 4
7 FM Square-ring for ultrafilter holders K14920001 2
8 FM Filter BiCart holder, upper and lower (50µm) K16538C 2
9 FM Filter SelectCart holder, lower (50µm) K16538C 1
10 FM Filter after the SelectBag holder (50µm) K16538C 1
11 FM Filter heating vessel (250µm) K14944001 1
12 FM V-ring heating vessel 100318086 2
13 FM Membrane for internal pressure regulator K40153001 1
14 FM Membrane for non-return valve K17989001 1
15 FM Sample port for 6 mm tube K20219002 1
16 FM Sealing ring (Inlet unit - heating vessel) K07994001 1
16 FM Ring (Inlet unit - heating vessel) K08227001 1
17 FM Sealing for infusion port K18184001 1
18 FM Label K24092001 1
Note!
As a complement to the Base-kit, two additional
kits are available; A- and B-kit.

Base-kit Maintenance Manual
How to exchange the parts included in

the Base-kit
1. First perform a combined heat disinfection 4. Change air filters in the AC/DC unit.
program with CleanCart C or liquid citric
acid.
Then perform a heat disinfection program in
combination with CleanCart A or a Chemical
disinfection program with sodium hypochlo-
rite. Refer to the AK 200 S or
AK 200 ULTRA S Operator’s Manual.
2. Change air filters in the Blood Monitor. 5. Change the upper and lower O-rings in the
BiCart holder.
2
3
1
o-ring
3. Change air filter in the Fluid Monitor. 6. Change the upper and lower O-rings in the
SelectCart holder.
2
3
1
o-ring

7. Change the O-rings and square-rings in the 10. Change the particle filter after the SelectBag
ultrafilter holders. (Only for AK 200 S with holder (50 µm).
UFD-kit and AK 200 ULTRA S)
o-ring
o-ring
square-
ring
8. Change the upper and lower filters on the 11. Change the filter for the heating vessel
BiCart holder (50 µm). (250 µm).
9. Change the lower filter on the SelectCart 12. Change the V-rings in the heating vessel.
holder (50 µm).
A B

13. If ULTRA: Change the membrane for the 16. Change the sealing ring and the ring on the
internal pressure regulator. inlet unit inside the heating vessel.
Note! It is important that the sealing ring is

re-assembled with its flat side according to
this illustration.
17. If ULTRA: Change the sealing for the

14. If ULTRA: Change the membrane for the infusion port on the FM front.
non-return valve.
15. Change the sample ports. 18. Mark month and year for the next scheduled
preventive maintenance. Attach the label to
the rear cover of the machine.
05 10
06 09
07 08
05 10
06 09
07 08

Actions to carry out after the parts

have been exchanged
1. Check that the screws for the blood pump(s) 3. Check that the wheels are tightened.
are tightened.
4. Check that the screw for the infusion stand is

2. Check that the screws for the hose clamps on
tightened.
the water inlet and drain tube are tightened.
5. Perform the Protective Earth Test (PET)

according to instructions available in
HCEN12190, Electrical safety inspections for
AK-machines.

6. Check the protective earth resistance in BM. 8. Erase the error code buffers. Enter
Measure between TP 8 (Z0VL) on the BM- service menu > Diagnose > System >
CPU board and the earth point on the bottom Errors > Erase
plate. Measure in MΩ, should be > 1 MΩ.
The machine must be empty and switched off
during measurement.
Note! The BM must be connected to the FM.
TP4
TP5 TP9
TP7 TP10
TP11
TP17
TP14 TP18
TP12 TP22
TP13
TP6
TP8
TP15
TP16
TP21
TP3 E01342007
TP19
TP2 TP20
1074
7. Check the protective earth resistance in FM.

Measure between TP 7 (Z0VL) on the Power
distribution board and the earth point on the
back plate. Measure in MΩ, should be
> 1 MΩ . The machine must be empty and
switched off during measurement.
TP1 TP4
TP2 TP3
TP7
TP8
TP5
TP6
E01345009

9. BPM-test 9.3 Check of air leakage
Note! By entering this test mode the air leakage

Following text is valid for machines equipped with for the BPM module, cuff hose and cuff
the SunTech blood pressure module (K24274001). will be tested automatically.
For machines equipped with the Colin blood pres- Before entering the test mode cuff and cuff
sure module (K23564001), refer to HCEN9291, hose to be connected to the AK 200 S /
revision 07.2005 for technical and maintenance AK 200 ULTRA S.
information about BPM. Cuff to be wrapped tight to the BPM test
equipment.
9.1 Test method:
- Attach BPM cuff, 100900141, tight to the

BPM test equipment, K22151001.
- Start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S with

the main switch and the ON/OFF button.
- Enter Service mode.
- Enter Diagnostics mode.
- Select BM, Others, BPM BPM test equipment is used to simulate

the patient arm circumference. The air
9.2 BPM sub-tests leakage is only tested for 90 sec but the
value is recalculated for 3 minutes.
In the BPM service menu the following sub- If the displayed value is above 18 mm Hg /
tests are included: 3 minutes, this indicates that there is a
- Air leakage test: measures that the equip- possible air leakage in the system.
ment is airtight.
- Inflation speed test: measures the time to fill It is of course also possible to perform this
the cuff with air. test without the cuff and cuff hose con-
- Static pressure: Check of pressure trans- nected but then the test will only check
ducer calibration for air leakage within the
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S. In this case
Each of the tests can be carried out separately replace the cuff and cuff hose by a tube,
but the above order for carrying out the sub- which is closed.
tests is recommended.
9.4 Check of inflation speed
Check that the results from the sub-tests not
exceed following limits: By entering this test mode the capacity for
- Air leakage: maximum 18 mmHg/ 3 min the pump within the module will be tested
- Inflation speed: 2 -11 s automatically. Before entering the test
- Static pressure: Maximum deviation from mode cuff and cuff hose to be connected to
reference to be within ± 3 mm Hg. the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S.
50 ± 3 mmHg
150 ± 3 mmHg Cuff to be wrapped tight to the BPM test
250 ± 3 mmHg equipment. If the displayed time is above
11 seconds, this test indicates that the
pump is worn-out.

9.5 Check of pressure transducer calibration and 10. Calibrate the Priming detector (BM 6).
measured pressure
10.1 Enter Service/Calibr/BM and set the
By entering this test mode it will be possible to AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S display to:
check the actual pressure value for the BPM
pressure on the AK 200 S / PRIMING DETECTOR
BM 6
AK 200 ULTRA S display.
Before entering the test mode, pressure trans- 10.2 Press to start calibration routine.
ducer calibration tube kit K13983002 to be
connected to the BPM connector on the rear of
the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S . No cuff and 10.3
cuff hose to be connected.
INSERT EMPTY REFERENCE TUBE
Press SET key when ready
Note! The pressure transducer calibration tube

kit must be drained before being connected, to
make sure that no fluids or particles enters the
BPM connector or tubing’s. This might otherwise
damage or destroy the sensitive BPM sensors.
When “Measured pressure” is displayed it is

possible to start applying the external reference
pressure.
Note! Pressures shall be applied very carefully

so that no overpressures occur.
To check the actual pressure value, external

pressure reference instrument to be connected 10.4 The calibration is now performed automati-
and external pressure of 250, 150, 50 mm Hg to cally and the calibration factor is written into
be applied. Check deviation from reference the EEPROM.
pressure instrument for displayed value.
10.5 The calibration value is now shown on the
information display:
READY BLOOD LEVEL

XX Confirm
10.6 Press the lit to confirm.

11. Calibrate the Level detector 12. Measure the power on battery B1 on the
(Air detector) (BM 5). BM-CPU board, exchange if the value is
below 2,6 V (Note! The machine must be
11.1 Enter Service/Calibr/BM and set the switched on when measuring).
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S display to:
LEVEL DETECTOR
BM 5
11.2 Press to start calibration routine.
11.3 Insert a filled drip chamber. It is recom-

mended that both the water and the drip
chamber have a temperature of approx.
37 ºC. Make sure that the level detector and
drip chamber are dry and clean. If possible,
the drip chamber shall be from the same
type of bloodline as will be used during
treatment.
11.4 Press the lit .

11.5 The calibration is now performed automati-
cally and the calibration factor is written
into the EEPROM.
11.6 The calibration value is now shown on the

information display:
READY LEVEL TRANSMIT

XX YYY Confirm
The value under LEVEL is the new alarm

limit, it is recommended that this value is
between 30 and 40 for best performance.
The value under TRANSMIT is the trans-
mission level, which is normally 255 but can
also be 160, if the air detector transducers
are exceptionally good.

13. Control of the blood pump occlusion The GO pin should barely pass within the cali-
brating area.
Check surface on the roller at the pump rotor, if
it is damaged exchange the unit. The roller unit The STOP pin is NOT allowed to pass in any
should easily go back to upper end position when point within the calibrating area.
it has been pressed down to end position, ex-
change unit if it gets stuck in any position. Note! Put grease on the GO and STOP pins
when not used and store gage in plastic bag to
Note! If the blood lines/infusion lines have a prevent it from corroding.
different wall thickness, the occlusion of the
blood pump must be adjusted to the right size. Note! The gauge pins can also be ordered sepa-
rately:
Use the gauge pins (stop/go) available in the kit T=1.1 (white) K40158002
K40158001. The kit includes following three T=1.6 mm (red) K40158003
different gauge pins: T=2.0 mm (blue) K40158004
T = 1.1 (Stop pin = 1.1*2*0.7 = 1.5mm)

T = 1.6 (Stop pin = 1.6*2*0.7 = 2.2mm)
T = 2.0 (Stop pin = 2.0*2*0.7 = 2.8mm)
Use following formula to calculate which gage

pin to use:
2 * wall thickness * 0,7 (mm)
Check the range between the blood pump rollers

and the path according to the picture below.
Adjust range between the blood pump rollers and
the path if it is necessary.
= Measuring

14. Enter Service/Calibr/BM and set the 15. Enter Service/Calibr/BM and set the
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S display to: AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S display to:
PRESSURE SYSTEM PRESSURE ARTERIAL

BM 1 BM 2

14.2 Make sure that nothing is connected to the
transducer (zero pressure) 15.2 Make sure that nothing is connected to the
transducer (zero pressure)
14.3 Check zero level of the System Pressure
Transducer. 15.3 Check zero level of the Arterial Pressure
Tolerance: ± 5 mmHg. Transducer.
Calibrate if necessary (see chapter calibration Tolerance: ± 5 mmHg.
for details). Calibrate if necessary (see chapter calibration
for details).

16. Enter Service/Calibr/BM and set the 17. Enter Diagnose/BM/Pumps and check that
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S display to: the blood pump(s) stops when the cover is
opened.
PRESSURE VENOUS
BM 3
16.2 Make sure that nothing is connected to the

transducer (zero pressure).
16.3 Check zero level of the Venous Pressure

Transducer.
Tolerance: ± 5 mmHg.
Calibrate if necessary (see chapter calibration
for details).
18. Start the blood pump(s) and let it run at

lowest possible speed. Open the blood pump
cover and place a magnet (1) on the sensor
for the cover. Stop the blood pump rotor by
manually grabbing the handle (2).
Check that the power to the blood pump
motor is switched off within 2 seconds.
1 2

19. Enter Service/Calibr/FM and set the 20. Enter Service/Calibr/FM and set the
DEGASSING PRESSURE FLOW OUTPUT PRESSURE

FM 7 FM 8
19.1 Press to start calibration routine. 20.1 Press to start calibration routine.
19.2 Disconnect a tube to achieve zero pressure 20.2 Disconnect a tube to achieve zero pressure
(see picture). (see picture).
19.3 Check zero level of the Degassing Pressure 20.3 Check zero level of the Flow Output Pres-
Transducer. sure Transducer.
Tolerance: ± 5 mmHg. Tolerance: ± 5 mmHg.
Calibrate if necessary (see chapter calibration Calibrate if necessary (see chapter calibration
for details). for details).

FLOW INPUT PRESSURE HIGH PRESSURE GUARD

FM 9 FM 10

21.2 Disconnect a tube to achieve zero pressure
(see picture). 22.2 Disconnect a tube to achieve zero pressure
(see picture).
21.3 Check zero level of the Flow Input Pressure
Transducer. 22.3 Check zero level of the High Pressure
Tolerance: ± 5 mmHg. Guard Transducer.
Calibrate if necessary (see chapter calibration Tolerance: ± 5 mmHg.
for details). Calibrate if necessary (see chapter calibration
for details).

DIALYSIS FLUID PRESSURE SAFETY GUARD PRESSURE

FM 11 FM 12
23.1 Press to start calibration routine. 24.1 Press to start calibration routine.
23.2 Disconnect a tube to achieve zero pressure 24.2 Disconnect a tube to achieve zero pressure
(see picture). (see picture).
23.3 Check zero level of the Dialysis Fluid Pres- 24.3 Check zero level of the Safety Guard Pres-
sure Transducer. sure Transducer.
Tolerance: ± 5 mmHg. Tolerance: ± 5 mmHg.
Calibrate if necessary (see chapter calibration Calibrate if necessary (see chapter calibration
for details). for details).
OR

25. If installed: Calibrate the pH-sensor 28. Check the conductivity indications, at ap-
(FM 13) with a buffer solution. proximately 14 mS/cm.
26. Remove the blood leak detector cover and Use GXL – fluid monitor screen and a refer-
clean the inside of the blood leak housing. ence instrument connected to the dialysis
fluid tubes.
Mount a blood leak calibration cover. Make
sure that the filter is in horisontal position, The indicated conductivity values in GXL
start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S. should correspond to the indication on the
reference instrument. The maximum devia-
Enter the Service menu, select calibration, tion is ±0.1 mS/cm.
FM, intern and Blood Leak Detector
(FM24). 29. Check the temperature indications, at ap-
Place A-pickup tube in concentrate contai- proximately 37 °C.
ner and let it stabilise for 15 minutes. Use GXL – fluid monitor screen and a refer-
ence instrument connected to the dialysis
Note! Let the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S fluid tubes.
stabilize at 37° C The indicated temperature value (at the
conductivity cell 2, guard) should correspond
to the indication on the reference instru-
Press to enter the blood leak calibra- ment. The maximum deviation is ±1.5 °C.
tion routine.
If the deviation is more than the stated
tolerance; the affected temperature trans-
Check the blood leak detector limits 0 and
ducer must be exchanged.
100 ±10.
Calibrate if necessary (see chapter
30. Place the B-pickup tube in the concentrate
calibration for details).
container.
Perform an FRN calibration. Enter service
27. Check the water level in the heating vessel,
menu/Calibr/FM/Other/UF/Restr.
should be approximately 1cm above the
centerline, adjust if necessary.

31. Let the machine pass Fch. Check the DC 38. If ULTRA: Calibration of internal pressure
leakage between TP 7 (Z0VL) on the Power regulator.
distribution board and the earth point on the
back plate. Measure in DC Voltage, should be
< 1 V. 38.1 Press and set the main flow to
32. Check the DC leakage between TP 7 (Z0VL) 500 ml/min.

on the Power distribution board and the
cover on the Degass pump motor. Measure in
DC Voltage, should be < 1 V. 38.2 Choose or .
33. Check the DC leakage between TP 7 (Z0VL)

on the Power distribution board and the 38.3 Press and switch to .
Degass pump head. Measure in DC Voltage,
should be < 1 V.
38.4 Connect the dialyzer coupling to the conduc-
34. Check the DC leakage between TP 7 (Z0VL) tivity cell on the reference instrument.
cover on the Flow Out pump motor. Measure 38.5 Adjust venous pressure to +100 mmHg and
in DC Voltage, should be < 1 V. TMP to +400 mmHg.
35. Check the DC leakage between TP 7 (Z0VL) 38.6 Connect a tube between the infusion port
on the Power distribution board and the Flow and an external pressure reference instru-
Out pump head. Measure in DC Voltage, ment.
should be < 1 V.
36. Check the DC leakage between TP 7 (Z0VL) 38.7 Press to obtain main flow through the
cover on the Flow In pump motor. Measure pressure regulator.
in DC Voltage, should be < 1 V.
38.8 Adjust the pressure regulator to
37. Check the DC leakage between TP 7 (Z0VL) +55 mmHg ±5 mmHg.
on the Power distribution board and the Flow
In pump head. Measure in DC Voltage,
should be < 1 V. 38.9 Press and remove the reference
instrument and tube.

39. Perform a simulated treatment according to · Check the residual volume at TIME=0:00
following instruction: · Approved residual volume:
100 ml ±50 ml.
· If the BVS is installed, switch it on. · Approved difference between actual
· The machine must be in volume control. UF volume and UF Supervision
· Insert a filled venous drip chamber in the volume is 120 ml.
level detector.
· When the priming button is flashing, simulate · The BVS test tool simulates a hemoglobin
a venous pressure of approximately 50 mmHg. value within the range 60 – 160 g/l.
· (Insert the BVS test tool, K22281001).
· Set the UF-volume to 0.9 and treatment TIME When inserted into the BVS unit it is possible
to 1:00h. to check the switch, that a reference value is
· Connect a T-piece to the dialysis tubings. Put taken and that a graph is shown on the infor-
the end of the tube in a measuring glass filled mation display when the BVS key is pressed.
with more than 1 liter of water, approx. 37 °C .
· Press fluid bypass. Check that the tube to the The value for relative blood volume will be
meassuring glass is filled with water and all approx. 0 % with some deviations. Do note
air bubbles are evacuated. that the blood flow must be more than 180 ml/
· Set the blood pump speed to 200 ml/min, press min for 5 minutes before a reference value is
the priming button and start the blood pump. taken.
· Press UF-rate and set priming UF rate and
minimum UF-rate to 0.0 l/h.
· Make sure the measuring glass is filled to 1.00
liter adjust if necessary.
Note! It is very important to do the following

things (A,B and C) more or less simultaneously
i.e. within seconds.
A: Simulate blood in the priming detector.

B: Make sure (again) that the measuring glass is
filled to 1.0 liter.
C: Press .
D: Press TMP when UF rate is approximately at

set value (check bargraph).
Note! Make sure that the blood pump is not

stopped by any alarm during this test since this
may affect the accumulated UF volume.
All kind of fluid alarms (conductivity etc.) have to
be avoided.

40. Check that the overload protection on the

heparin pump is working.
41. Check the arterial clamp by attaching the

calibration tube set into the arterial clamp.
Enter priming mode and create a level
detector alarm to get the clamp closed. Apply
a pressure of 600 mmHg. Check that the
pressure does not fall more than 30 mmHg in
15 seconds.
42. Check the venous clamp by attaching the

calibration tube set into the venous clamp.
Enter priming mode and create a level
detector alarm, by lowering the level in the
drip chamber, to get the clamp closed.
Apply a pressure of 600 mmHg.
Check that the pressure does not fall more
than 30 mmHg in 15 seconds.
43. If installed: Check the battery backup by

disconnecting the mains plug. Let the ma-
chine run for at least 1 minute.
Note! This is not a capacity test of the

backup batteries. Instructions how to per-
form a capacity test of the backup-batteries,
refer to chapter Calibration in AK 200 S /
AK 200 ULTRA S Service Manual.
44. Reconnect the mains plug to the outlet

supply of an electrical safety tester.
Perform the Earth Leakage Test (ELT) and

the Patient Earth Leakage Test (PLT) ac-
cording to instructions available in
AK-machines.
45. Perform heat/chemical disinfection.

A-kit Maintenance Manual
Preventive Maintenance: Supplementary A-kit
Parts
The A-kit is designed to be used as a complemen-
tary addition to the Base-kit for the preventive
maintenance procedures of AK 200 S and
AK 200 ULTRA S.
The A-kit (K40166001) includes following exterior

parts:

1 FM Pick-up tube (red) K13467002 1
2 FM Pick-up tube (blue-white) K13467001 1
3 FM Dialyser connector set (blue) K14082002 1
3,4 FM Locking ring (Dialyser connector) K22591001 2
4 FM Dialyser connector set (red) K14081002 1
4 FM Conical filter L50824001 1
4 FM O-ring for conical filter 100319046 1
4 FM Nipple K13736001 1
5 FM Non-return valve K17978001 1
6 FM Washer, blood pump rotor K07316001 4
Note!
All parts in the A-kit are possible to exchange
without opening the dialysis machine.

Maintenance Manual A-kit
How to exchange the exterior parts

included in the A-kit
1. Change the pick-up tube A (red). 4. Change the dialyser connector set red,
locking ring, nipple, conical filter and O-ring.
5 mm
2. Change the pick-up tube B (blue-white). 5. Change the non-return valve on the water
inlet tube.
3. Change the dialyser connector set blue and 6. Add/change the washers for the blood pump
the locking ring. rotors.
5 mm

A-kit Maintenance Manual

been exchanged
1. First perform a heat disinfection program. Use following formula to calculate which gage
Refer to the AK 200 S or AK 200 ULTRA S pin to use:
Operator’s Manual. 2 * wall thickness * 0,7 (mm)
2. After the heat disinfection; re-tighten the nuts Check the range between the blood pump rollers
of the dialyser connector set to the machine. and the path according to the picture below.
Nuts 5 mm
= Measuring
3. Let the machine pass FCH. Adjust range between the blood pump rollers and
A leakage test of the dialyser connector set is the path if it is necessary.
peformed in state 24.
The GO pin should barely pass within the cali-
brating area.
The STOP pin is NOT allowed to pass in any

4. Control of the blood pump occlusion
point within the calibrating area.
Check surface on the roller at the pump rotor, if Note! Put grease on the GO and STOP pins
it is damaged exchange the unit. The roller unit when not used and store gage in plastic bag to
should easily go back to upper end position when prevent it from corroding.
it has been pressed down to end position, ex-
change unit if it gets stuck in any position. Note! The gauge pins can also be ordered sepa-
rately:
Note! If the blood lines/infusion lines have a T=1.1 (white) K40158002
different wall thickness, the occlusion of the T=1.6 mm (red) K40158003
blood pump must be adjusted to the right size. T=2.0 mm (blue) K40158004
Use the gauge pins (stop/go) available in the kit
K40158001. The kit includes following three
different gauge pins:
T = 1.1 (Stop pin = 1.1*2*0.7 = 1.5mm)

T = 1.6 (Stop pin = 1.6*2*0.7 = 2.2mm)
T = 2.0 (Stop pin = 2.0*2*0.7 = 2.8mm)

Maintenance Manual B-kit
Preventive Maintenance: Supplementary B-kit
Parts
The B-kit is designed to be used as a complemen-
tary addition to the Base-kit for the preventive
maintenance procedures of AK 200 S and
AK 200 ULTRA S.
The B-kit (K40167001) includes following

overhaul parts:

Spike kit BiCart- and SelectCart holder
1 FM K21557006 2
(PEEK lower)
Complete valves:
2 FM FOVA, DIVA, TAVA, BYVA, DRVA K15235A 8
BCVA, TPVA, PBVA
3 FM Recirculation valve (complete) K15514002 1
4 FM Silicon tube (3x2mm) 100312032 7m
4 FM Silicone tube 2x1,5 100312166 1m
5 FM Santoprene tube 100312141 2m
6 BM Venous pressure line (complete) K21353A 1
7 BM Arterial pressure line (complete) K15145001 1
8 BM System pressure line (complete) K21358A 1
9 BM Pump tube (air pumps) K22114001 3
9 BM Strap (air pumps) 100314015 3

B-kit Maintenance Manual
How to exchange the parts included in

the B-kit
1. Change the lower complete spike house and 4. Change all the Silicone tubes in the fluid
O-rings in the BiCart and SelectCart holder. monitor.
Assemble according to machine configuration.
2. Change following complete valves: 5. Change all the Santoprene tubes in the fluid
FOVA, DIVA, TAVA, BYVA, DRVA, BCVA,TPVA monitor.
and PBVA.
3. Change complete Recirculation valve. 6. Change the (complete) venous pressure line.

Maintenance Manual B-kit
7. Change the (complete) arterial pressure line.
8. Change the (complete) system pressure line.
9. Change the pump tubes for the air pumps.

Clean the rollers with ethanol (70 %).

B-kit Maintenance Manual

been exchanged
1. First perform a heat disinfection program.

Refer to the AK 200 S or AK 200 ULTRA S
Operator’s Manual.
2. Let the machine pass FCH.
3. Perform a BiCart / SelectCart priming

according to the Operator’s Manual.

HCEN12088 © Gambro Lundia AB,2001. Revision 05.2006

Box 10101
SE-220 10 Lund
Sweden
Tel: +46 46 16 90 00
Fax: +46 46 16 96 96
www.gambro.com
Replacements
Replacements
General information.......................................... 2
Raplacement matrix, BM .................................... 2
Raplacement matrix, FM .................................... 3
Change actions .................................................... 4
Flow path, AK 200 S ............................................ 6
Flow path, AK 200 ULTRA S ............................... 7
AK 200 S/AK 200 ULTRA S 3:1

HCEN9284 Rev.05.2006
Replacements
General information
The actions to carry out after a component This information is a guideline for service techni-
replacement in AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S cians, which actions to perform when a compo-
are brought together in two tables: nent has been replaced.
- a replacement matrix for the blood monitor (BM)
- a replacement matrix for the fluid monitor (FM) Note! If the fluid path has been opened for
troubleshooting, a heat disinfection must be
The numbers in the matrix show which actions performed before the machine is ready for next
and in which order they will be done. It is impor- treatment.
tant that the actions are done and in correct
order.
Replacement matrix
- BM components
Replaced BM components
Blood Volume Sensor (BVS) E
Level detector (Air detector)
Venous / System air pump

Blood pump motor unit
Pressure Transducer
Replacement matrix
Clamp unit complete
Blood pump rotor
Operator's panel
Priming detector
BM CPU board
BM components
Heparin pump
I2c scan 1
Check/load program (GXD) 1
Total default 2
Load preset file 4
J
Fch 1 2J 2 8
J
2J 2J 2J 1J 3J 2J 1J
Set time and date 3
Actions to be done
Calibrate Level detector

5 (BM 5) 1 (BM 5)
(Air detector)
Calibrate Priming detector (BM 6) 6 (BM 6) 1 (BM 6) 1 (BM 6)
A A
Calibrate Pressure transducer 2
Occlusion 1
Simulated treatment 3
BVS test with tool K 22 281 001 4
Test clamp according to
3
calibration level 2
PET-test 1 1
ELT-test
PLT-test
Remarks:
A
Not necassary to calibrate if new spare part is installed (factory calibrated)
B
Important to follow the order of the calibrations/actions for machine performance
C
Contact International Technical Services
D
Only AK 200 ULTRA S
E
BVS unit and BVS board must have the same serial number
F
Heating vessel: Level detector, stirrer, temp. Transducer
G
Heating vessel: Heating unit complete, inlet unit complete
H
FCH with BiCart
I
FCH in BiCart Select-mode
J
FCH without inlet water (ready when Priming-button is flashing)
3:2 AK 200 S/AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9284 Rev.05.2006
Replacement matrix
- FM components
HCEN9284 Rev.05.2006
AK 200 S/AK 200 ULTRA S
Replaced FM components
D
C
B
B
D
Replacement matrix
B
B
F
G
B
D
FM components
B
Level detector
Degassing Pressure
FIP restrictor
FIP Transducer
FM CPU board
FOP restrictor
FOP Transducer
Internal pressure regulator
Non-return valve
Runtime meter board
ACDC
BiCart bubble trap
BiCart holder
BiCart Select
Control Pump
BiCart Select
BiCart Select
Protective Pump
Bloodleak
BPM
Carbon tubes
(dialyzer isolation kit)
Conductivity Cell A
Conductivity Cell B
Conductivity Cell C - Diascan
Degassing chamber
Transducer
Degassing pump
Expansion chamber
External pressure regulator
Feeding pump A
Feeding pump B
FIP pump
Flow Restrictors, except FIP
and FOP restrictors
FOP pump
Heat exchanger
Heating vessel
Heating vessel
HPG Transducer
Infusion port
Mixing chamber
Particle filters
PD Transducer
pH cell
Protective earth screw
SAG Transducer
SelectBag holder
SelectCart bubble trap
SelectCart holder
UF-cell
Va lves , e xcept FOVA
Valves, FOVA
Clean the machine from calcium

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
and then from proteins and fats
I2c scan 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1
Check/load program (GXD) 2
Total default 3
Load preset file 4
Calibrate FRN 4 2 2 4 6 2 2 4 3 2 2
Calibrate Conductivity Cell A A 3A 2A
A A
Calibrate Conductivity Cell B 3
Calibrate pH 1
A A A A A A A
Calibrate Pressure Transducer 2 (FM 7) 3 (FM 9) 3 (FM 8) 2 (FM 10) 2 (FM 11) 2 (FM 12)
Calibrate Bloodleak 2
Calibrate BiCart Select Control
1 1 5
and Protective Pump
Calibrate Internal pressure
1
regulator
Calibrate BiCart Select Level
Actions to be done
1
detector
Fch 2 1H 1H 2 2 2 3 2 2 4 5 3 1 3 1 1 2 1 1 3 3 5 1 7 3 3 5 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 3 4 1 3 1I 1I 1I 3 1 3
Heat Disinfection 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 6 7 5 2 4 2 2 2 2 4 4 6 2 8 4 4 6 2 2 5 4 2 3 2 2 2 4 5 4 2 2 2 5 2 4
Check conductivity value 5 6 4
Simulated treatment 4
Calibrate pressure according
1
to Technical Data
Check BPM 1
PET-test 1 1 1 1
ELT-test 3 3 3 2
PLT-test 4 4 4 3
Remarks:
A
Not necassary to calibrate if new spare part is installed (factory calibrated)
B
Important to follow the order of the calibrations/actions for machine performance
C
Contact International Technical Services
D
Only AK 200 ULTRA S
E
BVS unit and BVS board must have the same serial number
F
Heating vessel: Level detector, stirrer, temp. Transducer
G
Heating vessel: Heating unit complete, inlet unit complete
H
FCH with BiCart
I
FCH in BiCart Select-mode
J
FCH without inlet water (ready when Priming-button is flashing)
Replacements
3:3
Replacements
Change actions Calibrate Bloodleak

Perform actions according to calibration instruc-
A list of all actions and explanations how to tions in the Service Manual chapter 10,
execute them is found below. Calibration manual.
Clean the machine from calcium and then from Calibrate BiCart Select Control and Protective
proteins and fats Pump
Perform actions according to Operators manual. Perform actions according to calibration instruc-
tions in the Service Manual chapter 10,
I2C scan Calibration manual.
Perform actions according to Service Manual
chapter 4, Service Technicians Guide, Diagnostic Calibrate Internal Pressure Regulator
Flow diagram, FM. Perform actions according to calibration instruc-
Check/Load program (GXD) Calibration manual.
Perform actions according to instructions in
Service Manual chapter 4, Service Technicians Calibrate BiCart Select Level detector
Guide, Downloadnew program version. Perform actions according to calibration instruc-
Total default Calibration manual.
Perform actions according to instructions in
Service Manual chapter 4, Service Technicians Fch
Guide. Start the machine and let it perform a Fch.
Load preset file Heat disinfection

Perform actions according to instructions in Perform a heating according to the Operators
Service Manual chapter 4, Service Technicians Manual.
Guide.
Check conductivity value
Calibrate FRN Check conductivity value according to hospital
Perform actions according to calibration instruc- laboratory.
Calibration manual. Simulated Treatment
Simulate a treatment according to instructions
Calibrate Conductivity Cell A in Service Manual chapter 2, Maintenance
Perform actions according to calibration instruc- manual.
Calibration manual. Set time and date
Set time and date according to instructions in
Calibrate Conductivity Cell B the Service Manual, chapter Service Technicians
Perform actions according to calibration instruc- Guide.
Calibration manual. Calibrate pressure according to Technical Data
Perform actions according to Service Manual
Calibrate pH chapter 6, Technical Data and Specifications.
tions in the Service Manual chapter 10, Check BPM
Calibration manual. Check according to BPM test instructions in the
Service Manual, chapter Maintenance Manual.
Calibrate Pressure Transducer
Perform actions according to calibration instruc- Calibrate Level detector (Air detector)
tions in the Service Manual chapter 10, Calibrate according to calibration instructions in
Calibration manual. the Service Manual chapter 10, Calibration
manual

HCEN9284 Rev.05.2006
Replacements
Calibrate Priming Detector

Calibrate according to calibration instructions in
the Service Manual chapter 10, Calibration
manual.
Calibrate Pressure transducer

the Service Manual chapter 10, Calibration
manual.
Occlusion
the Service Manual, chapter Maintenance
Manual.
BVS test with tool K2 2281 001

tions in the Maintenance Manual.
Test clamp according to calibration level 2

the Service Manual, chapter Maintenance
Manual.
PET
Perform the Protective Earth Test (PET)
AK-machines.
ELT
Perform the Earth Leakage Test (ELT)
AK-machines.
PLT
Perform the Patient Earth Leakage Test (PLT)
AK-machines.
AK 200 S/AK 200 ULTRA S 3:5

HCEN9284 Rev.05.2006
3:6
AK 200 S Flow path
Replacements
Flow Recirculation Expansion

restrictor RFVA valve chamber
FLVA Mixing Degassing Degassing

Heating Over Flow chamber DRVA pressure chamber with
vessel flow restrictor
Degassing level detector
P
PAVA M restrictor
Filter C P
Heat Filter
Ex- T
T Cond T pH-sensor
changer P
Non- cell A
Degassing
return
valve pump P T
LDVA
Control pump Cond
Level
INVA detector cell B
Protective pump T
C
Select
Non- Select Bag PBVA
return
valve FOVA Restrictor
Pressure Filter
regulator Feeding pump A Flow Flow
P
output output
Filter
BCVA Feeding pump B pump pressure
TPVA ZEVA
Filter BiCart
BiCart
Blood leak
Bubble trap detector UF-measuring
Flow input EVVA EMVA cell
pressure P T
Cond
Flow input cell C
Deairating 2 1
Restrictor pump
Pure Particle P chamber with
water filter PD level detector TAVA
inlet P
SAG Safety HPG
Drain P by-pass
BYVA
unit
DIVA
Pure water
SelectBag concentrate
SelectCart concentrate
A concentrate
B concentrate
Dialysis fluid
Dialysate
HCEN9284 Rev.05.2006
AK 200 ULTRA
S S Flow path
HCEN9284 Rev.05.2006
Water filter U8000S Mixing Degassing Degassing
FLVA Heating Over Flow chamber DRVA pressure chamber with
P
Flow PAVA M restrictor
Filter C P
restr- Heat Filter
ictor Ex- T T pH-sensor
changer Cond T P
Non- cell A
Non- Degassing
return
return valve pump P T
LDVA
valve Control pump
Level Cond
Protective pump T
C
Select
return
Pressure Filter
P
output output
Filter
TPVA ZEVA
Filter BiCart
BiCart
Blood leak
pressure P T
Cond
Flow input cell C
Deairating 2 1
Restrictor pump
inlet P
SAG Safety CWVA HPG
P Pressure Dialysis fluid
Drain by-pass
HDVA regulator filter BYVA
unit
FIVA Infusion DIVA

Pure water port U8000S
A concentrate
B concentrate
Dialysis fluid
Dialysate
Replacements
3:7
Replacements

HCEN9284 Rev.05.2006
Service Technicians Guide
Service technician’s guide
Operator’s panel.................................................. 2
Hygiene group .................................................... 2
Mode group ......................................................... 2
Therapy group .................................................... 2
Treatment overview group ................................ 2
Stand-by group ................................................... 2
Display and setting group .................................. 2
Treatment overview ........................................... 4
Parameter buttons and displays ........................ 4
Stand-by group ................................................... 5
Alarm buttons ..................................................... 5
Display and setting group .................................. 6
Viewing trends on the screen ............................ 6
Bargraph contrast .............................................. 7
Backlight ............................................................. 7
Colours in parameter displays ........................... 7
Treatment overview screen ............................... 8
Function check overview screen ....................... 9
Service maintenance menu ............................. 10
Preset mode introduction ................................ 11

Configuration .................................................... 11
Language version ............................................. 12
Time-settings .................................................... 12
Total default ..................................................... 13
PC Preset.......................................................... 13
Start up mode ................................................... 14
Degassing pressure table for Acetate .............. 15
Preset of concentrates ..................................... 16
Logging mode introduction ............................ 18

Logging mode flow diagram ............................. 19
Arrays ............................................................... 20
Flow diagram, FM with S-variables ............... 21
Logging diagram for BM with S-variables ....... 24
Service mode introduction .............................. 25

Service mode flow diagram .............................. 26
Blood monitor flow diagram, calibration ......... 27
Fluid monitor flow diagram, calibration .......... 28
Diagnostic flow diagram ................................... 29
Error Buffers flow diagram .............................. 30
Diagnostics BM ................................................. 31
Diagnostics FM ................................................. 32
Utility flow diagram ......................................... 33
Download new program version ...................... 34

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
4:1
Operator’s panel
Below follows a short presentation of the
operator´s panel. This is intended for the service
technicians use. If you want a more detailed
information about all buttons and their functions
see Operator´s manual.
The panel consists of a number of buttons and

displays. These can be divided into six logical
groups:
1. Hygiene group
These buttons are used to select machine modes
mainly related to disinfection, rinsing and drain-
ing of the fluid monitor.
2. Mode group
The buttons in this group are used to select
different treatment modes.
3. Therapy group
These buttons are used to initiate priming, select
heparin data and special treatment therapies.
The HF-button is only available for
AK 200 ULTRA S.
4. Treatment overview group

This group graphically shows the status of the
treatment and allows for a complete overview of
all important treatment parameters.
5. Stand-by group
These buttons can be used for direct control and
stand-by of certain functions.
6. Display and setting group

The four buttons and the set knob are used for
setting of all parameters except the blood flow.
The flow is always directly controlled with the
blood flow knob. The information is shown on
the information display.
4:2 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
1. Hygiene group 3. Therapy group 5. Stand-by group
AK 200 S
2. Mode group 4. Treatment 4. Treatment 6. Display and

overview group overview group setting group

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
4:3
Treatment overview Parameter buttons and displays

Shows graphically the status of the treatment Setting of a parameter can generally be de-
with the displays and the flow pictures. This scribed as follow:
allows for a complete overview of all important
treatment parameters within a few seconds. 1. Press the selected parameter button.
The actual information will be displayed on the
Blood path: 1. 2. information display.
The blood path lights up red when the priming
detector detects blood. 2. Set the value with the set knob,
(select set value or alarm limits by pressing the
Bypass path: 3.5.7.
appropriate button).
The bypass path is orange when the dialysis
fluid is not correct. When the fluid is correct, the
path is green. The Bargraph displays operate as follows:
Dialyzer path: 3.4.6.7. • Red bars for alarm limits.

The dialyzer path is green when dialysis fluid • Yellow bars for actual value.
passes through the dialyser. • Green bars for set value.
Ultrafiltration path: 6.7.

The ultrafiltration path is yellow during isolated
ultrafiltration and fluid bypass situations.
2 1
4 6
3 5 7
Flow diagram
4:4 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
Stand-by group Alarm buttons

These buttons are used to start and stop the The alarm indicators are situated on the right
treatment and in alarm situations. side of the flow picture and only lights up in
alarm situatione. When a button flashes it is a
Is used to start and stop the blood pump. request for the operator to press the button.
Information will then be showed on the informa-
Is used to silence the buzzer. The buzzer tion display.
will only be silenced for 30 seconds of the Buzzer signal is combined with .
alarm persist.
Attention from the operator is required.
Is used to bypass the dialysis fluid.
When is lit and buzzer sounds a technical
fault has occurred.
Is used for initiation and termination of
treatment. It should normally not be
Enter ”Logging”, choose ”Errors” and read the
pressed during treatment.
displayed information. This information consists
of different error codes, described in the Error
Code List, ordering no. HCEN9313.
The buzzer will be silenced with .

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
4:5
Display and setting group Viewing trends on the screen

The information display and the four buttons Pressing a parameter button, e.g. “Cond” will
together with the Set knob, are used for display- display the parameter’s set value(s) and limits in
ing and setting of all parameters except the the lower part of the display. The top part will
blood flow. display a graph of the parameter as “trend”, i.e.
The blood flow is always directly controlled with the last 20 minutes.
the “Blood flow” knob.
Information display – goes blank after * Presetable

15* seconds, unless “Hold” is pressed.
Trend graph
Blood flow “LOW” “SET” “HIGH” Set
Blood flow-knob; activates Set-knob; changes

the blood flow display a selected value
“Hold”. If pressed when

the information display is
lit, the display is “held”
forever. If pressed again,
the display disappears.
4:6 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
Bargraph contrast Colours in parameter displays

The contrast for bargraph display is adjustable: The colours in the bargraphs are also used in the
texts in the information display. The top line is
Bargraphs black.
With a dark display, keep the middle arrow
TEMP LOW SET HIGH
button (“SET”) depressed to light up the display.
23.2 35.0 37.0 39.0
Turn the “Set”-knob until the contrast is opti-

mal. The setting is automatically stored Set point =
(permanently). Actual value = Green
Yellow
Backlight Limits = Red
There is a possibility to adjust a backlight for
the pushbuttons on the front panel.
Press ”SET” and then ”LOW” pushbuttons. When
”LOW” button beeing pressed (keep it pressed),
the ”SET” button can be released. After 3 sec-
onds the display will lit up.
Keep the ”LOW” button pressed and adjust the
backlight with the ”SET”-knob.

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
4:7
Treatment overview screen Parameters shown on Treatment overview

When no other screen is displayed on the infor- screen
mation display, the Treatment overview screen Qb current blood flow rate
will be displayed at all times during treatment.
Pa current arterial pressure
On this screen, the operator can obtain an
overall picture of parameter values, valid at that Pv current venous pressure
time, for the on-going treatment. All parameters
are measured values except sodium and bicarbo- Qbacc accumulated blood volume
nate concentrations which are set values.
Ps current system pressure
If desired, the Treatment overview screen can be
removed by preset and in that case the left UFR current ultrafiltration rate
Arrow button is to be pressed to display the
screen when the information display is unlit. UFV accumulated ultrafiltration volume (patient
weight loss)
The picture below shows an example of the
Treatment overview screen: accumulated ultrafiltration volume (patient
weight loss) as percentage of the set value
TMP current transmembrane pressure
Vinf accumulated infusion volume
Rinf current infusion rate
Na+ sodium concentration (set value)
HCO3 bicarbonate concentration (set value)
DBV relative blood volume from measurement

start (BVS)
SYS systolic blood pressure (BPM)
DIA diastolic blood pressure (BPM)
pulse rate (BPM)
time of latest measurement check (BPM)
K latest measured clearance value (Diascan)
Kt/V latest measured Kt/V value (Diascan)
time of latest measurement check (Diascan)
time to target is estimated to be within the

remaining treatment time set (Diascan)
4:8 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
Function check overview screen Tests shown on Function check

The Function check overview screen will be overview screen
displayed on the information display during the Fch_BM function check of the blood monitor
function check of the machine.
Fch_FM function check of the fluid monitor,
The screen gives the operator information about this position is the main test, tests
how long the function check has been in progress below are more detailed and in
and also what is being tested at that moment. cluded in this
The ticks to the right of each test show that the mS/cm test of the conductivity cell
test has been successfully performed. The green
field on the progress bar shows the successfully mS/cm test of the conductivity cell
performed part of the function check. The time
in minutes at the bottom of the screen shows °C test of the temperature sensor
elapsed time of the function check.
°C test of the temperature sensor
If desired, the Function check overview screen
can be removed by preset and in that case the mmHg leakage test of the fluid monitor
Technical alarm button is to be pressed to display
the screen when the information display is unlit. FRN test of UF supervision system
The picture below shows an example of the FRN test of UF supervision system
Function check overview screen:
BiCart priming of the BiCart cartridge

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
4:9
Service maintenance menu

Below is a description of how to use the buttons
in the Control group for logging service and
preset mode. For introduction purposes, the
information display together with the four
control buttons are illustrated step by step.
Subsequent information are given in the differ-
ent flow diagrams.
To enter, press the three buttons at the

same time for 3 seconds. The following will now
be displayed:
MAINTENANCE SUPPORT SELECTION
Exit LED-test Logging ServPres
Press the button below ”ServPres” and you will

be asked to set the service code:
SERVICE/PRESET CODE ENTRY

CODE: XX XX XX
Set the code with the Set knob (two digits for
each button). If you do not press the buttons
within 30 seconds, restart from the first figure is
required.
Note! The remaining time must be set at 0.00

and the blood path not illuminated before the
presetting can start.

Fch Preset Service
Select the desired mode by pressing the button

below this mode.
When exit from Preset or Service mode, the

AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S will restart and
perform a Functional check -Fch.
4:10 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
Preset mode introduction Configuration
In Preset mode, it is possible to customise the

AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S to each clinic wish. PUSH DIRECT KEY OR SELECT BELOW
For more information, contact Gambro service. Exit Config PC Pres Others
The choices are listed below:
• Type of units
• Options Configur- Preset Language and
• Language versions for the display ation with PC defaults
• Defaults
Choose the button below ”Config” to select unit.
• Type of concentrates
• Start up mode
• GXP - Gambro external PC -preset program
pH
installed (present)
Fch Preset Service Press
pH REF SET
installed installed
To configurate the unit, turn Set knob and

Select Preset. confirm by pressing the button below REF
SET.
NOTE!
•All preset values and limits must be verified
before treatment start. Press to store the configuration.
•Preset concentrates must be verified by This procedure is applicable for the following
laboratory test of the dialysate produced by the alternatives:
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S .
• pH (installed/not installed)
•Preset for pump segments must be verified by • BM200/202 (either)
comparing the pumped volume and a reference • System pressure transducer (installed/
volume. not installed)
• BVS (installed/not installed)
• RS 232 / RS 422 (either)
• BPM (installed/not installed)
• Diascan (installed/not installed)
• Access flow (installed/not installed)
• Voltage (230 V/115 V)
To return, press button.

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
4:11
Language version Time-settings
PUSH DIRECT KEY OR SELECT BELOW PUSH DIRECT KEY OR SELECT BELOW
Exit Config PC Pres Others Exit Config PC Pres Others
Select the button below ”others” to select Select the button below ”others” to select lan-
language, clock or defaults. guage, clock or defaults.
SELECT PRESET BELOW SELECT PRESET BELOW

Language Clock Default Language Clock Default
Select the button below ”language” . Choose the button below “Clock”.
LANGUAGE REF SET ADJUST CURRENT DATE AND TIME

English English (FR) 2006-05-29 11:25
Year Month Hour

To select language, turn the set knob. Day Minute
Select the button below ”REF SET”.
The button will stop flashing and will then go
out.
Press to store the chosen language. To save changes press to show the
chosen time.
To leave the Language menu, press .
- English
- French
- Spanish
- Swedish
- German
- Finnish
- Italian
- Dutch
- Danish
- CZECH
- Norway
- Serbian
- Hungari.
- Portugal
- Greek
- Russian
4:12 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
Total default PC Preset

In this mode it is possible to preset several
PUSH DIRECT KEY OR SELECT BELOW hundred parameters and start up values with
help of a PC and the GXP - Gambro eXternal
Exit Config PC Pres Others Preset -program”.
This set up is used for customising (within
certain limits) AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S to
each clinic wish.
For more information, contact Gambro service.
Select the button below ”others” to select lan-
guage, clock or defaults. EXTERNAL PC PRESET MODE
1
SELECT PRESET BELOW
See separate manual for GXP.
Language Clock Default
Choose the button below ”Default”.

Note! Only if you want a total default
WARNING!!!! ALL PRESETS WILL BE

DESTROYED Continue
ALL PRESETS WILL BE DESTROYED

Press START/STOP key to accept
Press to store the preset. This confirms that

the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S consist of a BM 200
without pH monitoring or other options
(standard AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S).
To return, press twice.

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
4:13
Start up mode
Arterial pressure window

PUSH DIRECT KEY OR SELECT BELOW Default: alarm limit, mmHg LL 0 Set 150
Exit Config PC Pres Others HL 2000
UF rate
Default: in TMP LL 0,00 HL 1,50,
UF priming, 0,10 Min UF 0,10
The start up values for AK 200 S/AK 200 ULTRA S pH

are set in the same way as other presets. Default: alarm limit Acetate, LL 6,0 HL 8,0,
Following values can be preset by pressing Bicarbonate, LL 6,5 HL 7,8
appropriate button:
Acetate / bicarbonate, BiCart
SN/DN, SP/DP Default: bicarbonate, BiCart
Default: DN, SP
Degassing pressure (bypass button), see table
Volume control/Pressure control Default Acetate:mmHg LL -700 Set -630 HL -500
Default:Volume control Default Bicarbonate = -580
Heparin
Volume (6,0 - 30,0 ml) and length (31,0 -119,0
mm) of syringe.
Default: volume 30,0 ml, length 81,0 mm.
Time (start up)

Default: 4,00
Venous pressure window

Default: mmHg, Low Level 0 Set 200
High Level 1000
Blood flow
Default: pump segment, mm Alt1, 7,90
Alt2, 6,35 Alt3, 4,00.
Note that AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S has to be
in DN mode to be able to adjust the blood line
inner diameter and the the blood pump has to be
stopped.
For adjustment of the occlusion, please see the
Calibration Manual .
SN data
Default: System press, mmHg LL 10 HL 175
Temp
Default: LL 35,0° C Set 37,0° C HL 39,0° C
Cond
Default in Acetate mode: 140 mmol/l
Default in Bicarbonate mode: Na=140 mmol/l
HCO3=34 mmol/l
4:14 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
Degassing pressure table for Acetate
The degassing pressure is presettable between -400 to -700 mmHg. This is used when AK 200 S /
AK 200 ULTRA S is operating at high altitudes, see table below.
Altitudes Normal air pressure Recommended degassing pressure Water boiling temperature
(m) (mmHg) (mmHg) (°C)
0 760 -630 100
500 710 -580 98.1
1000 663 -530 96.2
1500 620 -490 94.4
2000 580 -450 92.6
2500 540 -410 90.7

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
4:15
Preset of concentrates
Enter Preset mode.

PARAMETER REPRESENTATION
To preset acetate concentrate, press the Acetate
ion molecule
mode button.
To preset bicarbonate concentrate, press the
Bicarbonate mode button.
The default presets are:

Select ion representation.
• Acetate: mmol/l and ions.
• Liquid bicarbonate: mmol/l and molecules.
• BiCart: mmol/l and ions. IONS A: Na select
mmol/l xxxx.xx pos
Three different concentrates can be preset for
acetate and bicarbonate.
Following example will show how to preset the
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S for Gambro BiCart
A -concentrat 201. Push the arrow below "select pos" to set cursor
All values which are going to be set are specified IONS A: Na

at the label on the concentrate containers. mmol/l Forw xxxx.xx
NOTE! If the values are present as both
concentrated and diluted concentrate, use
the concentrated values.
Set cursor position at the digit which is going to
When the Bicarbonate button is selected, follo-
be changed, with the Set knob. To confirm the
wing will be displayed:
cursor position, press the arrow below "A: Na".
Set desired value with the Set knob.
SELECT BICARBONATE PRESET
Start up Concentrate
IONS A: Na Select
mmol/l xxxx.xx pos
Select Concentrate.
SELECT CONCENTRATE ALTERNATIVE To confirm selected value and change cursor

alt 1 alt 2 alt 3 position, press arrow below "select pos".
All values for the concentrate are set in this way.
IONS A: Na
mmol/l Forw xxxx.xx
Select where to store concentrate (alt 1).
NOTE! It is not possible to change BiCart

Select alternatives manually. Please use When ready to continue with the next part in the
external preset. concentrate, press "Forw" to confirm the value,
or step backwards by pressing "Backw".
BICARBONATE PRESET UNITS
gram/l mmol/l
Select mmol/l.
4:16 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
Choose Liquid or BiCart on the concentrate.
IS B_PART LIQUID OR BiCart?

Liquid BiCart
When all the values for the concentrate are set,

the display shows:
SET 201 select

LABEL BiCart char
Change cursor position and set concentrate label

characters in the same way as the values.
SET 201
LABEL Forw BiCart Backw
Press arrow below "Forw" when concentrate

label is correct.
PARAMETER CALCULATION
Press HOLD key to abort
STORE IN EEPROM
Press START/STOP key Backw
Press START/STOP button to write preset

parameters in EEPROM, or step backwards for
change of values by selecting "Backw".
NOTE! Preset concentrates must be verified

by laboratory test of the dialysate produced
by the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S .

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
4:17
Logging mode introduction

In the Logging mode it is possible to check the
condition and the status of both the hardware
and the software.
There are three types of logging facilities,

internal logging (Intern), External logging
(Extern) and technical error logging (Errors).
Enter the service display menu:

Exit LED-test Logging ServPres
The actual information is shown on the informa-

tion display, which can be divided into different
sections (0 - 2). To look at two or three different
parameters simultaneously, use the possibility
to select a separate field on the information
display for each parameter.
Select the button below ”Logging”.
field 0 field 1 field 2
4:18 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
Logging mode flow diagram

When pressing the button for "logging", the following information
will be displayed:
SELECT LOGGING FACILITY

Intern Overview Errors
OVERVIEW PAR INH CONFIRM CONFIRM

off FM Select
INTERNAL LOGGING SELECTION TECHNICAL ERROR BUFFER SELECT

Display Setup-A Setup-M Perm Diag Trans
Display the
logging parame-
ters on the
Memory Logging 0 Error message from CPU P:
information
(Do not use) FCN 1.06.002
display
Which CPU
No. of error (0-9)
Arrow, indicating more
Error code than one error
SET UP PAR INH FIELD CONFIRM
Use the set knob when
Array On 0 setting the parameters.
The setting of the parameter
Select informa- inhibiter determines if the
The "titel" Parameter logging display shall remain
tion display
key inhib– lit or not when a parameter
field (0-2)
itor. key is pressed.
Set "on" or "off"
FIELD ARRAY INDEX FORMAT

0 SRI 028 1
Select where you want the decimal
point or HEX. presentation.
Select array index (000 - 999).

Note! This number can be different
in different programs.
Always use corresponding Logging
list, HCEN-9314.
Select the array to be displayed

(See next page).
Information about which field

you are doing the set up for.

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
4:19
Arrays
When you push the button below the item

”array” and then turn the set knob you will find
a number of different codes.
The arrays used for service purpose are:
SRI SRL SRR SRB SRW

SP SF
The different letters stands for:

First letter,
S: Service logging parameters
Second letter,
R: RAM variable, P: Process, F: Function
Third letter,
B: Byte (0 - 255)
I: Integer (whole numbers)
L: Logic
R: Real (floating point numbers)
W: Word (0 - 65535)
Use the set knob when you select arrays and

press when you want to step backwards.
When it is necessary to look at two or three

different arrays at the same time, use the
possibility to choose a separate field on the
information display for each data.
Summary: 1. Set field

2. Set array
3. Set index
4. Set format
5. Push twice
6. Push ”display” and you receive
text with a value on a given
section.
4:20 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
AK 200 S Flow path
Control Cond: SRI(13)
Control Temp: SRI(15)
High level: SRL(20) PRS Cond: SRI(114)
HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006

Flow Low level: SRL(19) PRS Temp: SRI(116) Recirculation Expansion
restrictor RFVA SRL(51) valve chamber

FLVA SRL(47) Heating Mixing SRL(44) Degassing Degassing
Over Flow chamber DRVA pressure chamber with
SRI(8) level detector
Degassing
P Duty cycle: SRI(97) SRI(28)
Filter PAVA C P M restrictor
Heat Filter
Stick B: SRL(1)
Ex- Stick A: SRL(0) Duty cycle (%): SRI(89) T
T Cond T pH-sensor
changer P pH value: SRI(23)
SRI(14)
Non- cell A
Degassing
return
valve SRL(110) LDVA pump P T
Control pump Cond
Level Control Cond: SRI(12)
INVA detector Control Temp: SRI(115) cell B
SRL(49) PRS Cond: SRI(11)
Protective pump T
PRS Temp: SRI(16) C
Select
SRL(50)
return
Filter SRL(48)
Pressure
Rel pump speed: SRI(71) P
output output SRI(10)
Filter
BCVA SRL(58) Feeding pump B Rel pump speed (acetate): SRI(73) pump pressure
Rel pump speed (bicarb): SRI(72)
SRL(53 ) Duty cycle: SRI(31)
TPVA ZEVA
SRL(59) SRI(24) Current (mA): SRI(29)
Filter BiCart
BiCart
Pressure range high limit: SRI(43) Blood leak
Bubble trap Pressure range low limit: SRI(44) SRL(46) detector UF-measuring
SRL(45)
Flow input Low: SRL(60) EVVA EMVA cell
pressure P T
Cond
Flow diagram, FM with S-variables
SRI(9) Level: SRI(27) Ch2: Coil current: SRI(37)

Flow input cell C Flow
SRI(26) Main flow set point: SRI(67)
Calc set level: SRI(85) Deairating
PRS PD: SRI(2) Tar timer:
2 1 Flow Ch1: SRI(25)
Restrictor pump
Pure Particle Slow (TMP): SRI(3) P chamber with SRL(52) SRI(74) FRN: SRI(110)
filter Fast (Reg): SRI(4 ) PD level detector TAVA
water Duty cycle: SRI(35)
inlet Current (mA): SRI(33) P
SRI(7)
SAG Safety HPG
Drain P by-pass Slow: SRI(5)
BYVA Fast(reg): SRI(6)
unit SRL(42)
DIVA
Pure water SRL(43)
A concentrate
B concentrate
Dialysis fluid
Dialysate
4:21
4:22
AK 200 S UFD Flow path
FLVA SRL(47) Heating Mixing SRL(44) Degassing Degassing

Degassing
Heat Filter
Stick B: SRL(1)
Ex- Stick A: SRL(0) Duty cycle (%): SRI(89) T
T Cond T pH-sensor
SRI(14)
Non- cell A
Degassing
return
valve SRL(110) LDVA pump P T
Control pump Cond
Protective pump T
PRS Temp: SRI(16) C
Select
SRL(50)
return
Filter SRL(48)
Pressure
Filter
TPVA ZEVA
Filter BiCart
BiCart
SRL(45)
pressure P T
Cond
Restrictor pump
SRI(7)
SAG Safety HPG
FIVA Dialysis fluid Slow: SRI(5)
Drain P by-pass SRL(56)
filter BYVA Fast(reg): SRI(6)
unit SRL(42)
U8000S DIVA
Pure water SRL(43)
A concentrate
B concentrate
Dialysis fluid
Dialysate
HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006

AK 200 ULTRA
S S Flow path
HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006


Water filter U8000S Mixing SRL(44) Degassing Degassing
FLVA SRL(47) Heating
Degassing
Flow PAVA M restrictor
Filter C P
restr- Heat Filter
Stick B: SRL(1)
ictor Ex- Stick A: SRL(0) Duty cycle (%): SRI(89) T
T Cond T pH-sensor
SRI(14)
Non- cell A
Non- Degassing
return
return valve SRL(110) LDVA pump P T
valve Control pump
Cond
Protective pump T
PRS Temp: SRI(16) C
Select
SRL(50)
return
Filter SRL(48)
Pressure
Filter
TPVA ZEVA
Filter BiCart
BiCart
SRL(45)
pressure P T
Cond
Restrictor pump
SRI(7)
SAG Safety CWVA HPG
SRL(57) Dialysis fluid
Drain P by-pass Pressure Slow: SRI(5)
HDVA regulator filter BYVA Fast(reg): SRI(6)
unit SRL(61) SRL(42)
FIVA Infusion DIVA

Pure water SRL(56) port U8000S
SRL(43)
FM board temp: SRI(18) “ULTRA” valves estimated
SelectCart concentrate leakage SRI(113)
A concentrate
B concentrate
Dialysis fluid
Dialysate
4:23
Logging diagram for BM with S-variables
BM 202, S-variables
BM BOARD TEMP.:
SRI(17)
Pump cover open = Level det. transmit level=SRB(0)
Pump cover open =
SRL(24) Level det. comparator level=SRB(89)
SRL(25)
High level = SRB(1) SRI(1) SRI (82)
Blood flow = SRI(84) Low level = SRB(2) Blood flow = SRI(83)
Blood = SRL(23)
SRI(Ø) Estim. volume = SRI(88)

Accum. volume = SRI(87)
Overload = SRL(26)
Heparin fch counter = SRI(98)
Clamp active = SRL(2) CPU A CPU A Clamp active = SRL(28)

Clamp status = SRL(30) Clamp status = SRL(29)
Closed =S RL(34) CPU B CPU B Closed = SRL(33)
4:24 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
Service mode introduction

Fch Preset Service
Press the button for Service.
SELECT SERVICE MODE

Exit Calibr Diagnose Util
Choose calibration, diagnostics or utilities with the

appropriate button.
When you are in the service mode and want to step

back, press . When you leave the Service mode,
the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S will restart and
perform a Fch-functional check.

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
4:25
Service mode flow diagram
SELECT SEVICE MODE

Fch Calibr Diagnose Util
(See "Utility flow diagram")
(See "Diagnostic flow diagram")
SELECT MONITOR
BM FM HDF
(See "Blood Monitor flow

diagram, calibration")
SELECT FM SUPPORT OPTION

Extern Intern Other
(See "Fluid Monitor flow

diagram, calibration")

running with fluid
(See "Fluid Monitor flow diagram, SELECT FM SUPPORT OPTION
calibration") Lvl det SelPump UF
(See Calibration Manual,

FM calibrations)
SELECT UF CALIBRATION MODE

Manual Auto Restr
SELECT UF MANUAL CALIBRATION RESTRICTOR UF CALIBRATION

Complete Internal Verify CALIB NR 0
SELECT UF AUTO CALIBRATION

Complete Internal Verify
For more information, see chapter UF-calibration.
4:26 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
Blood monitor flow diagram, calibration
SELECT CALIBRATION
BM FM HDF
TEMPERATURE BM CPU BOARD

BM0
PRESSURE SYSTEM
BM1
PRESSURE ARTERIAL
BM2
PRESSURE VENOUS
BM3
A/D CONVERTE CPU P

BM (80188) BM4
LEVEL DETECTOR
BM5
PRIMING DETECTOR
BM6
BAG SEGMENT COEFFICIENT

BM7

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
4:27
Fluid monitor flow diagram, calibration

Extern Intern Other
Set
TEMPERATURE FM CPUBOARD
FM0
COND.TRANSDUCER 1
PRESSURE DEGASSING
Control/Guard FM30
FM7
COND.TRANSDUCER 1
PRESSURE FLOW OUT PUMP
Guard FM29
FM8
BiCart Select PROTECTP. VOL

PRESSURE FLOW INPUMP
FM28
FM9
BiCart Select CONTROLP. VOL

PRESSURE HPG
FM27
FM10
PRESSUREDIALYSISFLUID BLOOD LEAKAGE DETECTOR

FM11 FM24
PRESSURE SAFETY GUARD A/D CONVERTER CPU F;2

FM12 FM [80188] FM23
pH * A/D CONVERTER CPU F;1

FM13 FM [80188] FM22
A/D CONVERTER CPU P;Q

COND.TRANSDUCER 1
FM [3150] FM21
Controller FM14
COND. TRANSDUCER 1&2

COND.TRANSDUCER 2
Control(1,2)/Guard(1,2) FM20
Controller FM15
COND.TRANSDUCER 2 COND.TRANSDUCER 2
GUARD FM16 Control/Guard FM19
Set
COND.TRANSDUCER 1&2 COND. TRANSDUCER 1&2

Controller FM17 Control(1)/Guard(2) FM18
* FM 13 is available only if presetted in
the configuration menu
4:28 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
Diagnostic flow diagram
SELECT SERVICE MODE

Exit Calib Diagnose Util
(See "Service mode

flow diagram") (See "Utility flow diagram")
System: In this menu

DIAGNOSTICS SELECTION MENU
it is possible to scan System BM FM
EEPROMS:s, Wiew See Diagnostic FM
and erase error buffers
and check the A/D - See Diagnostic BM
converters
DIAGNOSTICS SYSTEM MENU
I2C ERRORS ADC
In I2C, it is possible to rename the Check of AD-converters
Pressure Transducers in the for CPU P, P;Q and F;1
(See "Error Buffers flow
diagram")
(change the address for a specified
transducer).
I2C Transd
SELECT Addr
XXXXX EEPROM Address Error If all transducers have

Name of the transducer:
the correct address, this
Connector number: Pxxx Update Escape will not be displayed.
Scanning I2C EEPROM
System pressure
pH EEPROM NOT INITIALAZED
transducer not instal-
Escape led.
Scanning I2C EEPROM
MonId EEPROM NOT INITIALIZED

RunTime Escape
Scanning I2C EEPROM
I2C EEPROM SCAN READY

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
4:29
Error Buffers flow diagram
Diagnostic error buffer

Sequential error buffer. 10 last errors are saved. Time from power on for each error is also saved.
Buffer is not cleared at power on. (see example below)
Transient error buffer

Transient errors during the actual treatment. 10 errors are saved. Buffer is cleared at power on.
Permanent error buffer

Normal error buffer that affects treatment. 10 errors are saved. Buffer is cleared at power on.
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM MENU

I2C ERRORS ADC
(See "Diagnostic Check of AD-converters

mode flow dia- for CPU P, P;Q and F;1
gram")
TECHNICAL ERROR SUPPORT SELECT

View Erase
TECHNICAL ERROR BUFFER SELECT

Perm Diag Trans
Select what type of error buffer you want to

check, (if any error message has been logged).
By pressing "Erase"
you reach the erase
TECHNICAL ERROR SUPPORT SELECT menu and can erase
View Erase the buffers.
Press "HOLD"-button for return to

the "Diagnostic System Menu.
Example for Diagnostic: Error code

Arrow, indicating more
than one error, to get
01- FCN 8.09. 003 next error meassage,
* CPU=P No = 67 T = 00:06:21:71 press the lit up button
No. of error (1-9) below the arrow.
If transition error Which No. of Time when error occurred

CPU treatment
when error
occurred
4:30 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
Diagnostics BM
DIAGNOSTICS BM MENU
Text Pumps Others
This option for Gambro

internal use only
PUMP DIAGNOSTICS MENU

Ven Art Hep
VENOUS PUMP DIAGNOSTIC

Freq
VEN FREQ SET

00344 00300
The venous pump will now start with the set

frequency. VEN FREQ displays the actual
frequency. The same procedure applies to the
arterial pump.
Note! Since some of the software regulators are

inactive, difference between set value and
actual value may occur.
HEPARIN PUMP DIAGNOSTICS

Counters I/O Scan
OTHERS DIAGNOSTICS MENU

Clamps BPM
See Calibration Manual
OTHERS DIAGNOSTICS CLAMPS MENU

CPU OB CPU P
Option, not supported yet
OTHERS DIAGNOSTICS CLAMPS MENU

CPU OB Ven Art
Pressing Ven or Art will then toggle the respective

clamps out and in.

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
4:31
Diagnostics FM
DIAGNOSTICS FM MENU
Pumps Valves
SELECT PUMP DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECT VALVES DIAGNOSTIC MODE

PU SCAN RECIRC
PU SCAN PU MODE SCA VAR SCA SET SELECT RECIRC DIAGNOSTIC MODE
HPG/PRI NONE CLOSE OPEN
HPG/PRI SCA VAR START TIME STOP

PRO/HPG NONE 0 10 0
PRO/PRI
NONE
TEMP
COND
HPG
PR FL 0
PR FL I
Select with "Set"-knob
4:32 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
Utility flow diagram
In utility it is possible to interrupt the chemical disinfection phase for service purposes. Note that
this is only intended to be used as a service tool.
WARNING! Check that no disinfection solution has been intaken, if so, a complete Chemical rinse
program must be performed.
SELECT SERVICE MODE

Exit Calib Diagnose Util
UTILITY SELECTION MENU

Chem sts Dis.attn Others
OTHERS UTILITY MENY Reset

CHEM DISINF INDICATION ERASE Bootload Exalis Pump param
Keep CHEM DIS pressed and wait
For future
Press Chem disinf. button for approx. 5 sec- implementation
onds and following display will show up:
Chemicaldisinfection indication is ENTERING BOOT MODE

OFF! Confirm to proceed Yes
See Download new program
version, page 4:34.
To step backwards, press .
Both Citric acid cleaning and Chemical disin-

fection mode will be interrupted in this way.
Remove disinf/decalc attentions.

Keep RINSE/DRN pressed and wait
Press Chem disinf.button for approx. 5 seconds

and following display will show up:
Disinf. and decalc attention.

are removed.

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
4:33
Download new program version
The purpose of GXD, Gambro eXternal

Download program, is to load the FLASH
memory of the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S with
executable object module code from a PC.
The AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S has three

CPU’s with FLASH memory with loader code:
0 - Operator Communication
B - Blood Control
F - Fluid Control
The code is saved on the PC in the three min-

files, AK200ob.min, AK200f.min and
AK200p.min.
Connect the PC to P64, Program Load Interface

on the rear of AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S.
Start GXD on the PC.
Enter the bootload meny according to page 4:33.

Click yes to confirm to proceed.
Select the wanted settings in the GXD panel.

The default settings are recommended.
Select program version and Com Port and click
the ‘Start’ button to start to download the
the new program version. Under transmission
the Progress panel is displayed.
When the transmission is done click the ‘OK’

button.
To abort the transmission click the ‘Abort’

button and wait for the button to change to a
‘OK’ button and click it. The GXD panel is
displayed.
To exit GXD click the ‘Exit’ button.
In order to load new program versions to the

machine it is possible to start the machine
directly in boot mode. Close jumper J2 on the
BM CPU board and start the machine.
4:34 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S

HCEN9285 Rev. 05.2006
Technical Description
Note!
This chapter is not available yet. Until it is released,
refer to Technical Description - AK 200 ULTRA S,
HCEN9296, Rev. 02.2003.
Attached to this chapter is a copy of the Technical

Description - AK 200 ULTRA S. Be aware of the
differences of the two machines and therefore only
use it as reference!
AK 200 S HCEN9286 Rev.02.2003 5:1

Introduction Electrical circuit boards used in

General ................................................................ 2 the fluid monitor
Main functions .................................................... 3 FM CPU board .................................................. 17
Parameters .......................................................... 3 FM Analog Distribution Board .......................... 19
FM power distribution board ............................ 19
Blood leak detector board ................................. 19
Fluid Monitor, FM Conductivity cell board ...................................... 19
Blood pressure monitor board .......................... 19
FM flow diagram ............................................. 5
Treatment Blood Monitor - BM

Water intake ....................................................... 6
Concentrate ......................................................... 6 Treatment modes
Concentrate - FM ................................................ 6 Double Needle Treatment – HD ...................... 21
BiCart Select System ......................................... 7 Single Needle Treatment - Single pump ......... 22
Dialysis Fluid ..................................................... 7 Single Needle Treatment - Double Pump ....... 23
Double Needle Treatment - HDF Low volume 24
Design and Construction Double Needle Treatment - HDF on line ........ 24
Heating Vessel Unit ......................................... 13 Double Needle Treatment - HF on line ........... 24
Degassing- and deairating chamber ................ 13
Flow Pump Units .............................................. 13 Design and construction
UF Measuring Unit .......................................... 13 Air Detector ....................................................... 25
Bypass Unit ...................................................... 13 Batteries ............................................................ 25
Dialyzer Connections ........................................ 13 Blood Pump Unit .............................................. 25
Blood Leak Detector ......................................... 13 BVS - Blood Volume Sensor ............................. 25
Safety Bypass Unit ........................................... 13 Drip Chamber Level Adjustment ..................... 25
Feeding Pumps ................................................. 13 Fan .................................................................... 25
Conductivity Measuring Unit .......................... 13 Heparin Pump Unit .......................................... 25
Water Inlet Unit ............................................... 13 Line Clamp Unit ............................................... 25
Mixing chamber ................................................ 14 Operator’s Panel ............................................... 26
Heat exchanger ................................................. 14 Pressure Transducers ....................................... 26
Priming Detector .............................................. 26
FM valves BPM ................................................................... 26
BCVA - BiCart Valve ......................................... 15
BYVA - Bypass Valve ........................................ 15 Electrical circuit boards used in
CWVA - Clean Water Valve .............................. 15 the blood monitor
DIVA - Direct Valve ........................................... 15 BM Analog Distribution Board .......................... 28
DRVA - Degass Restriction Valve ..................... 15 Panel control board ........................................... 28
EMVA - Emptying Valve ................................... 15 BM CPU Board .................................................. 29
EVVA - Evacuation Valve ................................. 15
FIVA - Filter Valve ............................................ 15 Power Supply .................................................... 30
FLVA - Flush Valve ........................................... 15
FOVA - Flow Output bypass Valve .................. 15 Monitor Stand
HDVA – HD/HDF Valve ................................... 15 Electrical operated ............................................ 31
INVA - Inlet Valve ............................................. 15 Height adjustable .............................................. 31
LDVA – Level Detector Valve ........................... 15
PAVA – Priming A Valve ................................... 15
PBVA – Proportion Bypass Valve .................... 15
Recirculation Valve ........................................... 15
RFVA - Return Flush Valve .............................. 15
TAVA - Taration Valve ...................................... 15
TPVA - Top Priming Valve ................................ 15
ZEVA - Zeroing Valve ........................................ 15
AK 200 ULTRA S HCEN9296 Rev.02.2003 5:1

Introduction fluid monitor maintains the dialysis flow through

General the dialyzer/filter with controlled ultrafiltration
or controlled TMP. When a fault occurs, the fluid
monitor bypasses the dialyzer. The monitor also
The Gambro AK 200 ULTRA S System is
detects blood leaks in the dialyzer. Both acetate
intended for use as a single patient machine to
and bicarbonate treatments can be performed.
perform hemodialysis (HD), hemodiafiltration
(HDF) and hemofiltration (HF).
The on-line production of substitution solution
can be deactivated and the AK 200 ULTRA S
The System is also intended for on-line
can be used for HDF with bags.
preparation of substitution fluids (see below) to
be used in HDF and HF.
The dialysis fluid consists of water and
concentrate. The fluid monitor operates either
The AK 200 ULTRA S System comprises of two
in acetate or bicarbonate mode. In bicarbonate
monitors; one blood monitor (BM 202) and one
mode the monitor mixes dialysis fluid from
fluid monitor (FM 202). The monitors are placed
water and two concentrates: acid and bicarbo-
nate. The mode is selected from the operator’s
panel.
When AK 200 ULTRA S is used to produce

bicarbonate containing dialysis fluid originating
from non-liquid concentrates, it is designed and
validated for use with the Gambro BiCart® sys-
tem.
When AK 200 ULTRA S is used to produce
sodium chloride containing dialysis fluid
originating from non-liquid concentrates, it is
designed and validated for use with the Gambro
BiCart Select® system, i.e. the SelectCart®
cartridge and SelectBag® concentrate.
The fluid monitor should be disinfected after

every treatment. The AK 200 ULTRA S is disin-
fected according to the Operator’s Manual, with
either chemical disinfectants or with heat disin-
fection.
The fluid monitor also includes a power supply

on a mobile stand (MS 200 or MS 202).
and a heat exchanger.
The blood monitor is designed to control and su-
pervise the extracorporeal blood circuit. Single
The MS 200 includes pressure regulator,
needle treatment can in hemodialysis be per-
infusion stand, a double filter holder for two
formed with one pump (double clamp function) or
ultrafilters and a bottom tray.
with two pumps. To prevent coagulation, heparin
may be administered by means of a heparin
The system is operated from the operator’s
pump. Single needle treatment can be carried
panel located on the blood monitor. For
out with one or two blood pumps. Double needle
information about the use and function of the
treatment is carried out with only one blood
operator’s panel, see chapter Service
pump. Hemofiltration or hemodiafiltration is
Technician’s Guide, or the AK 200 ULTRA S
only carried out in double needle treatment. The
Operator’s Manual.
second pump is acting as substitution pump in
these modes. Disposable lines are used for the
blood and the substitution flow.
The fluid monitor is designed to produce the

dialysis and substitution fluid at a desired
temperature, conductivity and pressure within
given specifications. It shall supervise the fluid
and transport the fluid through the dialyzer. The
5:2 AK 200 ULTRA S HCEN9296 Rev.02.2003

Main functions Parameters

System and treatment parameters can be set at
The AK 200 ULTRA S includes the following five different levels (Table1).
main functions: Level Type of parameters Presetable by:
4 Treatment Operator, nurse
parameters
Quick preparation procedures 3 Alarm limits and Clinics technician
• Automatic self test 2 New functions
defaults
Gambro technician or Gambro subsidiary
• Presettable treatment parameters 1 Adaptions Gambro Head office
0 Safety limits Fixed
Treatment flexibility
• Standard or high-flux HD with ultrapure
dialysis fluid For information about setting the parameters
• On-line HDF, with pre- or postdilution in level 2 and 3, see chapter Service
• On-line HF, with pre- or postdilution Technician’s Guide.
• On-line preparation of substitution fluid for
HF and HDF For information about the use and functions of
• Adjustable dialysis fluid flow rate 300-700 the parameters in level 4, see the
ml/min AK 200 ULTRA S Operator’s Manual.
• Profiling of Na+ and HCO3-, and UF
• Designed for Gambro BiCart Select® system
• Blood volume meassurement, BVS
• SN/SP and SN/DP with low recirculation
• Isolated UF
Disinfection
• Chemical and heat disinfection
• Automatic disinfection, integrated
disinfection
• CleanCart™ cleaning, decalcification,
disinfection
• Chemical disinfection memory
Options
• pH 200 K18266001
• Battery Backup K18614001 (24V)
• Electrically adjustable stand, MS 200
Others
• Automatic Power On Test
• External Logging via PC, GXL
• Presetting of system parameters (internal or
via external PC)
• Download of new software via PC, GXD

Fluid Monitor, FM

DRVA
Safety
by-pass
unit RFVA
P
Non-return A Mixing Expansion
SAG valve Recirc.
Drain chamber chamber
valve
Overflow
B Degassing
M Degassing
C P restrictor
PAVA chamber with
Water level detector
inlet FLVA Cond
T Water
INVA cell "A" P
FM flow diagram
filter T T
AK 200 ULTRA S HCEN9296 Rev.02.2003

Degassing
pressure
Pre-filter SRI(8)
(U8000S) Non-return
valve LDVA Level
Detector
PBVA pH-sensor
Control pump
(Option)
Select T
Cart
Protective pump Cond
Select cell "B"
Bag
Filter T
FOVA
Restrictor, V
Feeding pump "A" Flow output
pressure
P
Flow
BCVA TPVA output
Feeding pump "B"
Filter ZEVA pump
BiCart
UF-measuring
BiCart cell
bubble
Filter trap
2 1
EMVA
˚C
Drain Heat exchanger Restrictor, V EVVA

P Blood leak
detector
Flow input
pressure Deairating
chamber with TAVA
PD P
level detector P HPG
BYVA
Substitution port DIVA

CWVA
Particle Pressure
filter regulator
HDVA
FIVA
From
dialyzer Dialysis fluid outlet Substitution
(HD and HDF) outlet
Flow Diagram, Fluid filter
AK 200 ULTRA S (U8000S)
5:5
Treatment water in order to prevent the essential salts in

the blood from passing through the membrane
Water intake in the dialyzer into the dialysis fluid). Water
Feed water passes via a pressure regulator, an and concentrate are mixed in the expansion
inlet valve, a heat exchanger and an ultra filter chamber.
to a heating vessel. The ultra filter is
continuously flushed with a certain flow, The amount of concentrate is regulated by the
approx. 50-100 ml/min. that goes directly to feed pump (piston pump). The amount of
drain via a restrictor. concentrate to be added is determined by
measuring the conductivity of the fluid.
The feed water must fulfill the ASAIO and Conductivity is the ability of the fluid to conduct
AAMI standards on feed water for dialysis electricity. (The conductivity cell is used to
monitors. The pressure regulator reduces measure the conductivity of the fluid.) The
pressure to a maximum of 1 bar. conductivity depends on the dialysis fluid
temperature (approx. 1.8 % per °C). The
The temperature of the incoming water is raised temperature transducer in the conductivity cell
a couple of degrees in the heat exchanger. This is used to measure the temperature of the fluid
reduces the power consumption of the heating and as certain the correct conductivity value (to
elements. compensate for temperature fluctuations).
The inlet valve (INVA) is normally open. The If conductivity is outside the preset limits, the
water level in the heating vessel is regulated by dialyzer is bypassed and the dialysis fluid goes
means of a float valve in the bottom of the directly to the drain (the direct valve - DIVA - is
heating vessel. The float valve is closed when closed and the bypass valve - BYVA - is opened).
the water level reaches maximum and is opened This situation may arise if there is not sufficient
when it falls to minimum. The flushing valve concentrate, the concentrate pick-up tube is not
(FLVA), which is used during disinfection, is properly inserted in the concentrate container,
closed during treatment. the flow through the tube is obstructed or the
water supply is insufficient.
A non-return valve, placed between the The proportioning bypass valve - PBVA - is
recirculation loop, in front of the return flush closed during treatment. The PBVA is open
valve (RFVA) and behind the inlet water valve during disinfection. The reason for this is that
(INVA) is used to enable disinfection of the first there is an under pressure after the feeding
ultra filter. pump. When the fluid monitor is disinfected, the
system can be quickly filled with disinfectant if
The temperature transducer in the heating the PBVA is open.
vessel measures the water temperature and
controls the heating. The heating vessel has two
heaters and a stirrer. The stirrer is used to Concentrate - FM
ensure a constant water temperature. The FM can operate in either acetate mode or
bicarbonate mode (selectable by the operator).
From the heating vessel the feed water passes The concentrate (acetate) is fed in via the B-
via a filter and a restrictor to an expansion inlet.
chamber. The function of the restrictor is to
produce the negative pressure that is necessary In bicarbonate mode two concentrates are used,
for degassing the fluid. The bubbles are referred to as A- and B- concentrates.
separated in the degassing chamber. The
recirculation is controlled by a stepping motor. First the A- concentrate is mixed with water in
The degassing restrictor bypass valve (DRVA), the mixing chamber. The fluid then passes to
which is used during disinfection, is closed the expansion chamber, where the B-
during treatment. Constant pressure in the concentrate is added. The amounts of
expansion chamber and constant level in the concentrate are regulated with two feed pumps
degassing chamber are maintained by means of (piston pumps). The conductivity is measured by
the degassing pump and the recirculation valve. means of two cells. The conductivity cell in unit
1 measures the conductivity at the first stage.
The second cell measures conductivity after the
Concentrate B component has been added.
The dialysis fluid is a mixture of water and
acetate based concentrate. (Salt is added to the

Dialysis Fluid
BiCart Select System
The dialysis fluid is forwarded by the degassing
The BiCart Select system is a new concept for pump (gear-wheel pump) to the bubble trap.
preparing the A- and B-concentrate in bicarbo- The restrictor and the flow pump produce a
nate dialysis treatments. negative pressure (approx. -600 mmHg), that
separates the air from the fluid. The air is led
The A-concentrate is prepared “on-line” during from the degassing chamber back to the heating
the treatment from the SelectBag, containing vessel (there is atmospheric pressure in the
the small electrolytes in a highly concentrated degassing chamber). The flow pump is also used
solution, and from the dry sodium chloride to regulate the fluid level in the degassing
cartridge, SelectCart. chamber. The level is monitored by a level
detector.
The bicarbonate concentrate is continuously
prepared from the dry bicarbonate powder It is very important that the dialysis fluid
contained in the BiCart column. The BiCart Se- should have the correct conductivity. It is very
lect system improves transportation, storage and important that the system is able to detect if an
handling efficiency. It introduces a possibility for incorrect concentrate is being used. The pH-
individualized sodium and bicarbonate concentra- sensor (optional) is used as an improved
tions, independent from the prescribed concen- safeguard against faulty and/or incorrect
trations of the small electrolytes. concentrates. (There is some disinfection
solutions that can give correct conductivity. But
The control system feeds the contents of the these solutions do normally not have the correct
SelectBag in a volumetric proportion (1:400) to pH value.) If the concentrate pick-up tubes are
the dialysis fluid flow rate. incorrectly inserted, this will also produce an
incorrect pH value.
The flow of sodium chloride solution from the
SelectCart is controlled using the ordinary A- After the pH-sensor there is a flow reducer and
step control loop but the B-step is unchanged. a bypass valve (FOVA). The function of the flow
reducer is to create a negative pressure.
The use of AK 200 ULTRA S with BiCart Select
system is equal to the use of standard treat- The main flow is variable between 300 and 700
ments with one exception: ml/min.
• Select concentrates do not run with any
canister bicarbonate but only with BiCart. The bypass valve FOVA (closed during
treatment) is used in disinfection mode. The
The correct proportioning of the minor flow through the dialyzer is controlled by means
electrolytes is monitored by the protective pump of two pumps: flow output pump and flow input
and an infrared level detector. The level pump (gear-wheel pumps). The function of the
detector consists of an IR-LED and an IR- pumps is to maintain a constant flow, to and
transistor placed on a fluid chamber. from the dialyzer.
A saturated solution of sodium chloride (NaCl) Treatment can be either volume controlled (UF)
is produced from dry salt contained in the or pressure controlled (TMP). The mode is
SelectCart column. selected from the operator’s panel.
Both components are mixed on-line to produce In both UF and TMP mode, a variable main
the A-concentrate. The mixing of this acidic flow (300 - 700 ml/min) to the dialyzer is
concentrate with water is conductivity- obtained by means of the flow output pump.
controlled. The pressure over the flow reducer is
adjustable, and thereby, a variable main flow is
Bicarbonate concentrate is produced separately obtained.
by means of the BiCart column. Its mixing is also
conductivity-controlled. Constant flow after the dialyzer is obtained by
means of the flow-input pump. The input flow is
The final supervision of the dialysis fluid is normally higher than the output flow. Dialysis
performed by an independent conductivity cell. patients are water retentive and the excess is
removed during treatment. The UF rate is a
PAVA and PBVA are open during the priming of measure of the quantity removed. If the output
the SelectCart and the BiCart columns. flow is 500 ml/min, the input flow may, for exam-

ple, be 502 ml/min. In UF mode, the differential bypass valve is opened. The dialysis fluid is led
flow from the UF measuring cell and the re- past the dialyzer directly to the drain. The
quired UF rate (selected by the operator) is used following situations result in a bypass:
to regulate the flow input pump so that the de-
sired pressure is obtained. After the flow input • Blood leak detected
pump there is a positive pressure. • Temperature out of limits
• Conductivity out of limits
In TMP mode, TMP is used to regulate the flow- • pH alarm (optional)
input pump. The UF measuring cell is used to • Technical error message
measure the UF rate, but the measuring cell is
not involved in the regulation of the flow input From the direct valve (DIVA) the dialysis fluid
pump. is forwarded to a second ultra filter and further
on through an infusion-outlet-port, a pressure
Every 30 minutes during treatment, the UF regulator and the clean water valve (CWVA).
measuring cell is automatically calibrated to
ensure correct performance. (This has to be done The infusion line set is connected to the infusion
because waste products in the fluid returned outlet-port to access the infusion solution.
from the patient may be deposited in layers on
the inside of the measuring channels.) The pressure regulator is used to always
The calibration can be divided into three maintain a positive fluid pressure (approx. +50
phases. During phase 1 the UF measuring mmHg) to ensure that the infusion line segment
system is calibrated. During phase 2 the UF does not collapse during operation.
measuring unit and the dialyzer are bypassed,
i.e. there is no fluid passing through neither of The filter valve (FIVA, closed during treatment)
the two channels (DIVA, TAVA, and BYVA is used for disinfection of the second
valves are closed and ZEVA valve is open). Thus ultrafilter.
the offset of the two measurement channels can
be measured. From the clean water valve (CWVA) the dialysis
Finally during phase 3 the dialysis fluid fluid is passed on to the dialyzer or in bypass
bypasses dialyzer but passes through the UF mode to drain.
measuring unit, i.e. the same amount of fluid is
passing through both channels of the UF In hemofiltration mode (HF mode) the clean
measuring cell (DIVA, TAVA, and ZEVA valves water valve (CWVA) is always in bypass mode
are closed and BYVA valve is open). but for hemo dialysis mode (HD mode) or hemo
diafiltration mode (HDF mode) it may operate
With channel 1 as a reference, channel 2 can be in both modes. The dialysis fluid is forwarded to
calibrated. The UF rate is now zero. Calibration the dialyzer via the output tube.
takes totally about 60 - 90 seconds.
Treatment is then resumed. From the dialyzer the dialysis fluid (mixed with
waste products) is returned to the fluid monitor
After the UF measuring cell there is a pressure via the input tube. The input tube nipple is
transducer (high-pressure guard) which is fitted with a filter.
activated if the pressure before the dialyzer
becomes too high. For example, if there is a The taration valve (TAVA) is normally open.
blockage somewhere in the tubes, the high During the UF measuring cell calibration, the
pressure guard is activated, the flow is stopped taration valve is closed.
and the system goes into bypass mode (see
below). The zero setting valve (ZEVA) is normally
closed. During the UF measuring cell
The bypass unit includes high-pressure guard calibration phase 2, the zero setting valve is
and two valves: the direct valve (DIVA) and open.
bypass valve (BYVA). The direct valve is
normally open during treatment (if the The pressure transducer, Pd, measures the
temperature, pressure, conductivity etc. are dialysis fluid pressure. The measurement is used
within the predefined limits). In an emergency in the calculation of the TMP. The pressure
situation (e.g. in the event of a blood leak being transducer also activates an alarm if the pres-
detected), the direct valve is closed and the sure becomes too high.

The dialysis fluid is fed to the bubble trap. The

function of the bubble trap is to separate air
from the fluid. For example, a leakage may
occur in the dialyzer. When the fluid level in the
bubble trap reaches the minimum level, i.e.
when there is too much air in the vessel, the
evacuation valve (EVVA) is opened and the air
is released. The fluid level is monitored with a
level detector.
The blood leak detector detects any blood in the

dialysis fluid. In the event of the slightest leak
between the blood side and dialysis fluid side of
the dialyzer, an alarm will be activated. If blood
is detected, the system goes into bypass mode.
The emptying valve (EMVA), which is closed
during treatment, is used to empty the blood
leak detector when treatment is completed.
Finally, the dialysis fluid is led to the drain via

the flow-input pump and heat exchanger.

Design and Construction

Following section describes the sub-units, the
valves and the electrical boards used in the
fluid monitor.
3 4 5
7
2 8
9
15 14 13 12 11 10
1 Internal Pressure Regulator 11 High Pressure Guard

2 Blood Leak Detector 12 UF Measuring Unit
3 Pump Unit 3 (flow in) 13 Deairating Chamber
4 Pump unit 2 (flow out) 14 Safety Bypass Unit
5 Pump Unit 1 (degassing) 15 Infusion Port
6 Particle Filter
7 Degassing Chamber
8 Heating Vessel Unit
9 Bypass Unit
10 Concentrate pick-up tube connections

3 4 5 6 7
2 9
10
11
1 Conductivity Cells 11 Air Collect Chamber

2 Level Detector
3 Control Pump
4 Protective Pump
5 Feeding Pump A
6 Feeding Pump B
7 Mixing Chamber
8 Top Priming Chamber
9 Heat exchanger
10 Reducer Unit

3 4 5
6
2
10 9
1 Relay Unit 6 FM CPU Board

2 pH-sensor (optional) 7 Blood Pressure Nipple
3 BPM (optional) 8 External connections: See installation guide
4 Run Time Meter 9 Power Supply
5 Power Distribution Board 10 FM Fan

Heating Vessel Unit transducer is connected to the transducer board,

The heating vessel unit contains the following: via a twisted cable. The transducer board
• Heating vessel. interfaces directly to the distribution board via
• 2 heating rods with over heating guard. a board connector.
• Temperature transducer (PT 100) with
temperature transducer board. The PT 100 Dialyzer Connections
transducer is connected to the transducer
The input tube nipple is fitted with a particle
board, via a twisted cable. The transducer
filter.
board interfaces directly to the FM Analog
Distribution board, via a board connector.
• Float valve. Blood Leak Detector
• Water level guard. The blood leak detector includes the following
• Stirrer with 12 V DC-motor. components:
• 2 pick-up tube detectors. • Housing with cover.
• Transmitter board.
Degassing- and deairating chamber • Receiver board.
They have both the function to separate air • Blood leak detector board. The transmitter
from the dialysis fluid. Each degassing- and and receiver boards are connected to the
deairating chamber contains a level detector. blood leak detector board, via twisted
cables. The blood leak detector board
The deairating chamber also contains a interfaces directly to the distribution board,
pressure transducer. The pressure transducer is via a board connector.
used to measure the dialysis fluid pressure. The
pressure transducer is connected to the Safety Bypass Unit
transducer board, via a twisted cable. The The safety bypass unit includes the following:
transducer board interfaces directly to the Safety pressure transducer with board. The
distribution board, via a board connector. pressure transducer is connected to the
transducer board, via a twisted cable. The
Flow Pump Units transducer board interfaces directly to the
The fluid monitor contains three pump units. distribution board, via a board connector.
Each pump unit includes the following:
• Gear wheel pump. Feeding Pumps
• Pressure transducer with board. The The fluid monitor contains two feeding pumps.
pressure transducer is connected to the Each pump unit consists of a piston pump
transducer board, via a twisted cable. The driven by a stepping motor.
transducer board interfaces directly to the
distribution board, via a board connector.
Conductivity Measuring Unit
• Output restrictor bypass valve, FOVA (flow
output pump), evacuation valve, EVVA (flow The fluid monitor has two equally conductivity
input pump), DRVA (degassing pump). measuring units, conductivity cell 1 and 2, in
order to support the requirement of one control
and one protective system measurement. The
UF Measuring Unit unit includes the following components:
The UF measuring unit consists of a measuring • Measuring cells.
cell and two printed circuit boards. They are • Conductivity board, which is mounted
mounted on each side of the measuring cell. The directly on the measuring cell. The
UF measuring unit interfaces directly to the conductivity board interfaces to the
main board, via a flat cable. distribution board, via a flat cable.
• Temperature transducers.
Bypass Unit
The bypass unit includes the following: Water Inlet Unit
• Direct valve - DIVA. The water inlet unit includes two valves: inlet
• Bypass valve - BYVA. valve - INVA - and flushing valve - FLVA.
• High Pressure Guard
The high-pressure guard is a pressure

transducer with a board. The pressure

Mixing chamber
Water and concentrate are mixed in the mixing
chamber.
Heat exchanger
The temperature of the incoming water is raised
a couple of degrees in the heat exchanger. This
reduces the power consumption of the heating
elements. The heat exchanger is located on the
back plate of the AK 200 ULTRA S.

FM valves: HDVA – HD/HDF Valve
BCVA - BiCart Valve INVA - Inlet Valve

Used during BiCart priming and top priming. The inlet valve is normally open to let water
into the heating vessel. It is closed in following
situations:
BYVA - Bypass Valve 1. If the water level in the heating vessel is too
Normally closed during treatment. Opens to let high.
the fluid bypass the dialyzer in alarm 2. In disinfection mode (except when the
situations. The BYVA is closed during the zero system is flushed).
flow phase in the UF self calibration and open
during the differential flow phase. LDVA – Level Detector Valve
The level detector is used in the protective
CWVA - Clean Water Valve system for supervision of the SelectBag flow.
In hemofiltration mode (HF mode) the clean
water valve (CWVA) is always in bypass mode PAVA – Priming A Valve
but for hemo dialysis mode (HD mode) or hemo PAVA is open during the priming of the
diafiltration mode (HDF mode) it may operate SelectCart and the BiCart columns.
in both modes. The dialysis fluid is forwarded to
the dialyzer via the output tube.
PBVA – Proportion Bypass Valve
Open in chemical disinfection when filling up.
DIVA - Direct Valve
Opens during BiCart priming.
Normally open during treatment. Closes in
alarm situations. Closed during UF-cell self-
calibration. Recirculation Valve
Proportional valve (three-way valve) controlled
by stepper motor. Part of the degassing level
DRVA - Degass Restriction Valve
regulation.
Open during heat disinfection to prevent the
fluid system from boiling by bypassing the
degassing restrictor. RFVA - Return Flush Valve
Open during disinfection for recirculation of
water.
EMVA - Emptying Valve
Three-way valve. Used to facilitate the emptying the
blood leak detector. TAVA - Taration Valve
Normally open during treatment. Closed during
UF self calibration.
EVVA - Evacuation Valve
Special three-way valve, only one of the house halves
has a seat. From the functional point of view it works TPVA - Top Priming Valve
like an ordinary open/close valve. Opens when the level Used during top priming.
in the deairating chamber drops below its low limit to let
out air from the chamber.
ZEVA - Zeroing Valve
FIVA - Filter Valve Only open during the zero flow phase of the UF
cell taration.
FLVA - Flush Valve
Open during disinfection for flushing the upper
part of the heating vessel.
FOVA - Flow Output bypass Valve

Open during heat disinfection to prevent the
fluid system from boiling by bypassing the flow
out restrictor.

EVVA FOVA DRVA
EMVA
ZEVA
TAVA
CWVA
FIVA
HDVA
BYVA
DIVA
BCVA
PBVA
PAVA
TPVA
LDVA
INVA FLVA RFVA

P5 is a 10 pins connector connected to I/O. Input

Electrical circuit boards signal from Bicart trap low level detector.
used in the fluid monitor

Output signals to valves. Power: + 24 V.
P6 is a 40 pins connector connected to Select

For a detailed description how to connect all units. Input signals from control and
cables in AK 200 ULTRA S, see chapter 8: supervision pump synchronization detectors,
• Wiring Diagram FM 200 S, K20583 supervision level detector, Select cart latch
• Wiring Diagram BM 200 S, K20595 status detector and Select bag position detector.
Output signals to control and supervision
Following is a brief functional description of pumps, supervision level detector and valves.
each board in the fluid monitor. Power: +5 V and +24 V.
P7 is a 4 pins connector connected to the I2C-

FM CPU board
EEPROM at the run time meter. Signals: CAD0
The FM CPU board controls most functions in and CAC0. Power: +5 V.
the fluid monitor of AK 200 ULTRA S.
The CPU board consists of two major parts, the P8 is a 2 pins power connector connected to the
control system and the protective system. Power Distribution Board FM. +24 V is supplied
in this connector.
The main CPU in the control system is CPU F
that controls I/O. The protective system consists P9 is a 20 pins connector connected to the
of three Echelon nodes that communicate Power Distribution Board FM. Input signals
through the protective system Echelon bus. The from an external RS232 interface and from the
FM CPU board is connected to the BM CPU Blood Pressure Monitor, BPM. Output signals
board through the two Echelon buses and the to the external RS232 interface, to the BPM
safe bus. The safe bus is a current loop that if and to the FM fan. Bi-directional signals are the
interrupted sets the machine in a patient safe Echelon bus signals CEDA, CEDB, PEDA and
state. The connection with the BM CPU board PEDB and SBSI that connects the safe bus
is done through the Power Distribution Board between FM and BM. Power: +5 V.
FM.
P10 is a 10 pins expansion connector for the
Inputs and outputs: protective Echelon bus. Signals: PEDA and
PEDB. Power: +5, +12 and -12 V.
P1 is a 60 pin connector connected to the
Analog Distribution Board. Input signals from P11 is a 10 pins expansion connector for the
temperature transducers, conductivity cells, control Echelon bus. Signals: CEDA and CEDB.
pressure transducers and blood leak detector. Power: +5, +12 and -12 V.
Output signals to blood leak detector and I2C- P12 is a 4 pins optional I/O connector. TIN1 and
EEPROMs. Power: +5, +12, -12 and +24 V. TIN2 are input signals. Power: +5V.
P2 is a 40 pins connector connected to I/O. P13 is a 10 pins analog test connector used in
Input signals from pH transducer, water vessel production. Five analog signals are connected to
low level detector and tube sense A and B. this connector.
Output signals to I2C-EEPROM:s, valves,
degassing motor, restrictor stepper motor and P14 is a 2 pins connector connected to the
stirring motor. Power: +5 and +24 V. deairating ultrasonic level transducer.
P3 is a 50 pins connector connected to I/O. P15 is a 2 pins connector connected to the degas
Input signals from heaters off detector and ultrasonic level transducer.
BiCart latch status detector. Output signals to
valves, conductivity 1 and 2 stepper motor, flow P16 is a 4 pins optional +24 V output connector.
motor in and out and heaters. Power: +24V.
P17 is a 20 pins connector for protective node Q
P4 is a 20 pin connector connected to the UFM used for emulation. The reset and the service
Preamplifier Board. Input signals: preamplified pin of the neuron chip are connected to P17
UF-measure signals. Output signals: UFFQ together with the 11 I/O pins. Power: +5 V.
(UF frequency) and signals to an I2C-EEPROM.
Power: +5, +12, -12 and +24 V.

P18 is a 20 pins JTAG test connector. Signals are Jumpers on the FM CPU board
the five JTAG test signals connected to the
FPGA and 8 further signals that can be used for J1
J2
Short-circuiting causes the protective node Q to send a service message
Short-circuiting resets the protective node Q
test of the FPGA. Power: +5V. J3 The jumper, connected to the FPGA, can be used for test purpose
J4 Short-circuiting resets the Select supervision node
J5 Short-circuiting resets the control communication node
J6 Short-circuiting causes the control communication node to send a service
P19 is a 20 pins connector for the Select message
supervision node used for emulation. The reset J7 Short-circuiting causes the Select supervision node to send a service message
J8 Short-circuiting resets the protective flow restrictor node
and the service pin of the neuron chip are J9 Sets CPU F, OB and P in boot load mode ready to receive new software
J10 Short-circuiting resets the Select control node
connected to P19 together with the 11 I/O pins. J11 Short-circuiting causes the Select control node to send a service message
Power: +5 V. J12 Short-circuiting causes the protective flow restrictor node to send a service
message
P20 is a 20 pins connector for the control

communication node used for emulation. The
reset and the service pin of the neuron chip are
connected to P20 together with the 11 I/O pins.
Power: +5 V.
P21 is a 20 pins connector for the protective

flow restrictor node used for emulation. The
reset and the service pin of the neuron chip are
connected to P21 together with the 11 I/O pins.
Power: +5 V.
P22 is a 20 pins connector for the Select control

node used for emulation. The reset and the
service pin of the neuron chip are connected to
P22 together with the 11 I/O pins. Power: +5 V.
BM CPU Board 4 kV insulation barrier Relay Interface

P1 P79
Relays
EMI
K2, K3
filter
and K1
UF-cell Calibration
FM CPU Board
Interface
P2
P76
UF-cell cal.
EMI
Interface
M5VL, M0VL filter
Control
Running-time Meter GSS and Logging
P74 Interface
P63
GSS and
logging IF RS232 or RS422 EMI
M5VL, M0VL Control filter
Optional Z24P
P77 HDF and Program
AC/DC Unit Load Interface
P65 EXTTX, EXTRX P64
HDF and
prog. load IF RS232 EMI
Z24P, Z0VP Z5VL, Z0VL
Control filter
M5VL, M0VL
BM CPU Board X5VL,
P59 X0VL
X12V, X0VC RE1A, RE1B M5VL, M0VL DC/DC
CSCP, CSRS, CSLL, CSHL Converter
BAFI EXTP,
OBTXD, OBRXD0, RSSEL FM CPU Board X0VL
MAFI P61
OBTXD, OBRXD1 Z5VL, Z0VL
REMO Ext. Power
CEDA, CEDB BPMRX/, BPMTX/ P78
PEDA, PEDB CTS/, RTS/
SBSI EXRES/
M5VL, M0VL Fan M0VL
P72 Z24P, Z0VP Blood Pressure
FAND, FANR Monitor Board
P3

FM Analog Distribution Board

This board is localized in the AK 200 ULTRA S Blood leak detector board
fluid monitor, where its function is to gather all The blood leak detector board is localized in the
the sensor signals to one cable that is connected AK 200 ULTRA S fluid monitor where it is a
to the main FM CPU board. The devices that are part of the blood leak detector. This detector
connected on this board are: measures the optical transmission with a LED
• Conductivity cells and a phototransistor. The LED current is
• All fluid pressure sensors controlled with this PCB and the measured
• Blood leak detector phototransistor current is converted to a
• Temperature sensors voltage. Calibration values for the detector are
• Dia connector sensors also stored on the board.
• Return flow valve – RFVA
• Feeding Pumps Conductivity cell board
• Conductivity Measuring Unit
This board is used to measure the conductivity
• Water Inlet Unit
of the dialysis fluid. It is designed with two
• Top Priming Unit
equally, completely separate, circuits in order to
support the requirement of one control and one
The distribution board contains 13 board
protective system measurement. The
connectors, which are used to interface the
conductivity cell board also includes electronic
transducer boards. Three of the connectors are
for PT100 temperature sensors that are used
normally not used. The temperature/pressure
for temperature compensation of the
transducer and the transducer board must not be
conductivity measurement.
separated. If the transducer is to be replaced, the
transducer board must also be replaced (and vice
versa). It is important that the transducer boards Blood pressure monitor board
are connected to the correct distribution board The blood pressure monitor board is used in
connector. For example, board connector P22 AK 200 ULTRA S when an optional blood
must not be used for any other transducer board pressure monitor (BPM) is connected. It is
than the dialysis fluid pressure transducer board. designed to supply the BPM with needed power
supply. The Blood pressure monitor board is
FM power distribution board located between the power distribution board
and the BPM module.
The FM Power Distribution Board distributes
power from the AC/DC unit to the fluid monitor
and the blood monitor in AK 200 ULTRA S and
contains control logic for four external
interfaces.
It connects the control system Echelon bus, the
protective system Echelon bus and the safe bus
between the FM CPU board and the BM CPU
board. It also connects the Blood Pressure
Monitor (BPM) to the FM CPU board, supplies
operating voltage to the running-time meter and
distributes signals to the FM fan.

Blood Monitor - BM

Treatment modes The heparin pump is used for injection of

heparin to the blood in order to inhibit
Double Needle Treatment – HD coagulation. An alarm is issued when the
Following figure illustrates the flow diagram syringe reaches end of stroke or if the heparin
when the AK 200 ULTRA S is used for double line is kinked.
needle treatment.
The blood passes the Blood Volume Sensor
before it enters the dialyzer. The BVS gives
additional information about the patient’s
hydration status to the operator, by providing
Venous
Dialyzer pressure information about the change in the apparent
blood volume.
After the dialyzer there is a drip chamber with

an air detector. If air is detected in the blood or
if the blood level in the drip chamber is too low,
an alarm is issued and the blood flow is stopped
(the blood and heparin pumps are stopped and
the line clamps are closed). The drip chamber
acts as an expansion chamber to even out
pressure pulsation. The level in the drip
chamber is adjustable by means of a venous
level adjustment (the button on the front panel
that is located to the left of the venous line
clamp).
The venous pressure transducer measures the

Simplified Flow Diagram - venous blood pressure. If the pressure is too low
Double Needle Treatment or too high, the blood flow is stopped (the blood
and heparin pumps are stopped and the line
The function of the arterial blood pump is to clamps are closed). Too high venous pressure
maintain the extra corporeal blood flow. Blood is may be caused by an obstruction after the
removed from the patient, forwarded to the venous drip chamber or a change in the
dialyzer and then returned to the patient. The patient’s position. If the venous pressure is too
blood flow (0 - 500 ml/min) is set by means of a low, it could be caused by a line separation, an
knob on the operator’s panel. In an alarm obstruction before the venous drip chamber, a
situation the blood pump is stopped. fall in blood pressure or a change in the
patient’s position.
The blood pump will not operate when the pump
cover is open. In an alarm situation, the blood The priming detector detects if there is blood in
can be returned to the patient manually. The the venous bloodline.
blood pump has a handle that can be pulled out
and turned to return the blood. The blood is returned to the patient via the
venous line clamp. The clamp is normally open.
The arterial line clamp is open during normal But in the event of an alarm from the air
treatment. When an alarm is issued by the detector, the venous pressure transducer or the
airdetector or the blood leak detector (in the blood leak detector (in the fluid monitor), the
fluid monitor) the clamp closes and the blood line clamp clamps the blood line and stops the
pump is stopped. blood flow.
The arterial pressure transducer will issue an
alarm if the pressure becomes to low. For
example, if the needle or arterial blood line is
blocked, an alarm will be given (the blood pump
is stopped). The alarm is activated if there is an
increased negative pressure between the patient
and the blood pump, e.g. a fall in blood pressure,
altered positions of the arterial needle, or a kink
in the arterial line between the patient and the
blood pump.

Single Needle Treatment - Single pump When the AK 200 ULTRA S is used for single
Following figures illustrate the flow diagrams needle-single pump treatment, the arterial and
when the AK 200 ULTRA S is used for single venous phases are time- or pressure -controlled.
needle treatment.
Arterial blood is removed from the patient when
the arterial line clamp is open and the venous
line clamp is closed. The running time of the ar-
terial blood pump is determined by the operator.
In this way a positive pressure is created. In the
Dialyzer
Expansion
chamber
Venous
pressure
next phase, the blood pump is stopped, the arte-
rial line clamp is closed and the venous line
clamp is opened, i.e. the blood is returned to the
patient by means of the positive pressure.
The venous line clamp is then closed, the arte-

rial line clamp is opened, the blood pump is
started and the procedure repeated. In single
needle mode, the operator defines the length of
time the arterial and venous line clamps are to
be open and closed.
The expansion chamber evens out pressure

pulsation. The blood level in the expansion
chamber is electrically adjustable from front
panel.
Expansion Venous
Dialyzer chamber pressure
Simplified Flow Diagrams -

Single Needle Treatment - Single Pump.

Single Needle Treatment - Double Pump

Expansion
When the blood monitor is used for single chamber
needle treatment, both blood pumps are used. Arterial pump: Run, until
system pressure high limit
Note that the pumps are running in divergent is reached...
directions. Dialyzer
Venous
The treatment is controlled by a predefined pressure
stroke volume, mean blood flow and by the high

limit on the system pressure transducer (extra).
The required mean blood flow and stroke

volume is determined by the operator. When System
pressure
the mean blood flow is affected, the venous and
arterial blood pump will change its speed. The
venous pump is volume controlled.
Expansion
chamber
The mean blood flow is set in the same way as
Venous pump: Run, until
the required blood flow in the double needle stroke volume is returned...
treatment. When the SN button is pressed, the Dialyzer
arterial blood pump will start and will run until Venous
the expansion chamber is filled up (detected by pressure
the high limit on the system pressure trans-

ducer). The venous blood pump then will start,
and will run until the predefined stroke volume
has been returned to the patient. This is moni-
tored by the low limit on the system pressure System
pressure
transducer after the filter. The process is re-
peated throughout treatment.
Since the two blood pumps run alternately, the Simplified Flow Diagrams -
drip chamber acts as an expansion chamber to Single Needle Treatment - Double Pump
even out pressure pulsation.
The standard configuration includes three pres-

sure transducers: arterial pressure transducer,
venous pressure transducer and system pressure
transducer.

Double Needle Treatment - HDF Low Double Needle Treatment - HF on line

When AK 200 ULTRA S works in HF on-line mode,
volume
the setup for the lines are the same as for HDF,
The BM 202 offers the possibility to perform either pre- or post dilution can be used.
low volume HDF in double needle mode by
using the venous pump for infusion. Maximum See AK 200 ULTRA S Operator’s Manual for further
infusion rate is 2,0 l/h. information.
Note! This mode can only be used if the
AK 200 ULTRA S is used in an non-online
mode. See AK 200 ULTRA S Operator’s Manual
for further information.
Double Needle Treatment - HDF on line

These simplified figures shows how the
AK 200 ULTRA S is used for HDF on-line
treatment.
The venous pump operates as infusionpump,

taking infusion fluid from the infusionport on
the FM, pumping it through an ultrafilter, into
either the venous line (post-dilution), or the
arterial line (pre-dilution). Expansion
chamber U2000
See AK 200 ULTRA S Operator’s Manual for

further information.
Venous Venous
drip chamber pressure BVS
Dialyzer
Venous Level detector Arterial
pump pump
Arterial pressure
Expansion Priming
detector
chamber U2000 System
pressure
Venous Arterial Heparin pump

clamp clamp
Patient
Venous Venous
drip chamber pressure BVS
Dialyzer
Venous Level detector Arterial Infusion
pump pump port FM
Arterial pressure
Priming
detector
System
pressure
Simplified Flow Diagram -
Double Needle Treatment - post dilution
Venous Arterial Heparin pump
clamp clamp
Patient
Infusion
port FM
Simplified Flow Diagram -

Double Needle Treatment - pre dilution

Drip Chamber Level Adjustment

Design and construction Two different drip chamber levels can be ad-
justed. The level in the venous drip chamber is
Level Detector (Air Detector) electrical adjusted by pressing the level adjust-
The level detector consists of an ultrasonic ment buttons on the frontpanel.
transmitter and receiver mounted in one unit.
The transmitter is mounted on the right-hand The level in the venous drip chamber is
side of the drip chamber and the receiver is
adjusted by pressing ↑or ↓ in the right (blue)
mounted on the left-hand side. Bubbles larger
area.
than 1 µl will be trapped by the drip chamber. An
alarm will be issued if the blood level falls below
The level in the expansion chamber connected to
the middle of the level detector head.
the system pressure transducer connector may
be adjusted by pressing ↑or ↓ in the left (gray)
Batteries area.
A 9-volt battery, used to drive buzzer alarm
during mains power failure, is mounted inside
the blood monitor. The battery is connected after
Fan
installation. The drive motor (24 V DC-motor) and the fan
form a single unit.
A lithium battery, mounted on the main board,
is used to run the real time clock in Heparin Pump Unit
BM 202. The heparin pump unit consists of the following
components:
Warning! • Syringe pump. The syringe size can range
Lithium battery - danger of explosion! When between 6 and 30 ml (Default 30 ml).
replacing the battery, use the same type (re- • Stepping motor.
commended by Gambro service representative). • Gear box (1:120).
• Heparin pump position board.
Blood Pump Unit • Heparin pump position potentiometer.
• Load-limiting device.
The BM 202 includes two blood pump units
(arterial and venous blood pumps). The blood
pump unit consists of the following: Line Clamp Unit
• Roller pumps (self-threading). The blood monitor includes two line clamps,
• 24V brushless DC motor with an encoder for arterial line clamp and venous line clamp. The
velocity monitoring. arterial line clamp is located to the right and
• Gear box (1:50). the venous line clamp is located to the left when
• Cover detector. viewed from the front.
• Blood pump rotation detector. The clamp covers also have different colour
markings: the arterial clamp cover is marked
BVS - Blood Volume Sensor with a red dot and the venous clamp cover is
marked with a blue dot.
The BVS on the front panel is a passive
measurement device. It continuously measures
The line clamp unit consists of the following:
the hemoglobin concentration of blood in the
• Housing with covers (mounted on the front).
extra-corporeal circuit and calculates the
• Two solenoids, (as one unit).
relative change in the patient’s blood volume
• Line clamp driver board (clamp driver
during a dialysis session. The BVS includes a sen-
circuit on BM CPU board).
sor with optical components for transmitting
• Two clamp position detectors, (on the clamp
light through the cuvette in the bloodline. The
driver board).
BVS board has analog transmit- and receive- elec-
tronics for the optical components and digital
electronics for data acquisition, calculations and
communication with the main system. The BVS
board is connected direct to the Panel board, P2.

Operator’s Panel BPM

The operator’s panel user interface in The BPM (Blood pressure monitor) is physically
AK 200 ULTRA S consists of 45 buttons, 62 placed on the back of the AK 200 ULTRA S,
LED assemblies and flow indicators, 2 rotary behind the FM board. The BPM monitor is a
encoders, 8 bar graphs and a 3x7 segment LED passive measuring device that can issue atten-
display. tions and alarms but the alarms will not inter-
fere with the AK 200 ULTRA S treatment.
Pressure Transducers
The intended use for the BPM is to measure the
There are three different Pressure Transducers:
patient’s blood pressure and to activate an alarm
if the patient’s blood pressure goes under an
• Venous Pressure Transducer
alarm limit set by the operator. This will give
• System Pressure Transducer
the nurses the possibility to take measures
• Arterial Pressure Transducer
before the patient suffers the ill effects of hypo-
tension (low blood pressure).
BM 202 is equipped with a pressure transducer,
Venous Pressure Transducer, which is used to
The BPM module includes the following compo-
measure the venous blood pressure. This is lo-
nents; air pump, bleed valve, dump valve, two
cated on a transducer board, which interfaces
pressure transducers (control and protective) and
directly to BM Analog Distribution board, via a
microprocessor board. The module includes
board connector. The pressure transducer is con-
control and protective systems.
nected to the venous pressure transducer nipple
(located on the front panel to the right of the air
The control system measures the pressure and
detector), via a tube and to the level adjustment
pulse wave to calculate the systolic, diastolic,
device.
mean blood pressure and pulse rate. The air
pump, dump and bleed valves are controlled by
The BM 202 is equipped with a second pressure
this system as well as external communication.
transducer after the filter, named System
Pressure Transducer. This pressure will only be
The protective system supervises the maximum
displayed if the SN DATA button is depressed.
pressure and inflating time by using an separate
The transducer is mounted on a transducer
pressure transducer. Maximum pressure is 320 ±
board, which also interfaces directly to the BM
10 mmHg and maximum inflating time is 180
Analog Distribution board, via a board
seconds. When these values exceed specified
connector.
limits, dump and bleed valves are opened and air
pump is stopped by the protective system.
The BM 202 is equipped with a third pressure
transducer, named Arterial Pressure
A self-calibration/auto zero function is included
Transducer. This pressure will be displayed on
in the module, which means that the offset for
the arterial bargraph. The transducer is used
the pressure transducers is calibrated/adjusted
for true arterial pressure measurement or any
each time the module is turned on.
other pressure. The pressure transducer is
mounted on a pressure transducer board, which
The BPM measures and calculates the non-
interfaces to the BM Analog Distribution board,
invasive blood pressure by using the oscillomet-
via a board connector.
ric method. This method uses the pulsation that
occurs in the artery in the arm when it is re-
Priming Detector stricted by the inflated cuff. The noise or oscilla-
The priming detector is integrated in the Line tion originates from the fact that when the cuff
Clamp Unit. It has a detector board (on the restricts the vessel, the flow in the vessel be-
back of the front). The detector board contains comes turbulent, instead of laminar. The pulsa-
an LED and a phototransistor. The current tion causes the pressure in the cuff to oscillate
through the LED is indicating how much current which the pressure transducer in the BPM
that is needed to get a certain light transmission module measures.
through the light guides to the receiver. The
lower the value is the better.

The relationship between the changes of cuff

pressure and its oscillation is used to determine
the blood pressure. When the BPM deflates the
cuff and the blood starts to pass the restriction,
the oscillation incline rapidly and the systolic
(high) pressure is measured. When the oscilla-
tion has peaked and is declining rapidly the
diastolic (low) pressure is measured. The mean
pressure is measured when the oscillation is
peaking. The heart rate is determined by using
the pressure oscillations measured by the pres-
sure transducer.
When to measure the diastolic pressure is

determined by extensive experiments to estab-
lish an algorithm, which is included in the BPM
software.
In the field it is possible to perform a check of

the device to determine if it works or not.
The device has to be sent to Gambro for repair
incase of malfunction.

Electrical circuit boards Panel control board

used in the blood monitor The operator’s panel user interface in
AK 200 ULTRA S consists of 45 buttons, 62
LED assemblies and flow indicators, 3 rotary
For a detailed description how to connect all encoders (whereof 2 is used), 8 bar graphs and a
cables in AK 200 ULTRA S, see the attached 3x7 segment LED display. The handling was
drawing: previously placed in AK 200 ULTRA on the
• Wiring Diagram FM 200 S, K20583 BM CPU board. To free up more physical space
• Wiring Diagram BM 200 S, K20595 and to minimize the cables between the BM
CPU board and the panel, this functionality is
Following is a brief functional description of moved to a PCB placed directly beneath the
each board in the blood monitor. operator’s panel. The PCB is called the Panel
control board.
BM Analog Distribution Board Jumpers on the Panel control board
This board is localized in the AK 200 ULTRA S
blood monitor, where its functions is to gather J1, Echelon bus termination
1-2 Termination of CEDA-B bus
all the sensor and motor signals to one cable open No termination
that is connected to the main BM CPU board.
J2, Service control
The devices that are connected on this board Service pin for micro controller (Service message will be
are: 1-2 sent from the micro controlleron the echelon bus
• Arterial and Venous blood pump cover and open Normal
position detectors J3, Reset

• Heparin position, potentiometer and motor 1-2 Reset
Normal, reset only possible with IC2 or through command
• Priming and tube detector open on the echelon bus
• Level detector transmitter
• Arterial, venous and system pressure
• Motor A for pressure test
• One auxiliary contact
Jumpers on the BM Analog Distribution Board
J4, J5 Termination of EPRP and EPRN when system pressure is not mounted
J6 Termination of BPVC/ in case of single pump

BM CPU Board Inputs and outputs:

The BM CPU board controls the blood parts of
AK 200 ULTRA S and can easily be pulled P51
P56
P73 P60 P62 P67 P68 P71 P72
upwards and fixed in the service position. P57
P63 P65 P69
The board consists of two major parts, control P76 P66
system and protective system. P75
P74
The board handles I/O such as heparin pump, P61
blood pumps, priming and level detector, clamps P58
and fan. The BM CPU board is connected P55

P64
through communication with the FM CPU

board and Panel control board. P70
BM CPU
Blood board
board P59
The LCD display is connected to the BM CPU

board. Pressures are measured from external
sensors. Connectors on the BM CPU board
Connector Name Description
Jumpers on the BM CPU board P51
P55
Battery
Test Prot. Comm.
9 V battery back-up for power control logic.
Test connector for protective communication.
P56 Tacho BPA Tacho input for arterial blood pump.
J2 When closed the protective system is forced into boot mode.
P57 Motor BPA Motor output for arterial blood pump.
J3 When closed protective system communication node will reset P58 Test Prot. FPGA Test connector from protective FPGA
J4 When closed protective system communication node will be forced into service P59 Expansion Prot. sys Expansion from protective communication.
state. P60 Operators panel Connector to operators panel.
J5 Not used. Connected to protective FPGA. P61 Level detector Input from level detector interface.
J6 To select RS 232 port on FM Power Distribution board. P62 BM I/O Connector to BM I/O interface.
J7 When closed the control system is forced into boot mode. P63 24V Z24P / Z0VP voltage supply.
J8 When closed control system communication node will reset P66 Fan Output to the fan.
J9 When closed control system communication node will be forced into service P64 Test Contr. FPGA Test connector from control FPGA
state. P65 Level control Output for level adjustment pump
J10 When closed the blood pump voltage( R24V) and the pressure test voltage P67 Clamp Connector to clamp interface.
(PT24V) will be on disregarding status of protective system and the safe bus. P68 Tacho BPV Tacho input for venous blood pump.
J11 When closed the battery connected to P51 is charged. P69 Motor BPV Motor output for venous blood pump.
P70 Test Contr. Comm. Test connector for control communication.
P71 24V Supply Input for 24VDC-supply voltage.
P72 FM Power dist. Input and outputs towards power distribution
board.
P73 Back light Supply voltage for back light inverter on display
P74 Level adjustment Input for level adjustment keys.
P75 LVDS LDVS output interface for display
P76 Parallel interface Parallel interface from protective FPGA.

Power Supply
AC to the heating rods
DC to the Power distri-

bution board, P65
Safety latch for the Mains cable

mains cable connector
Figure 22. Power Supply
Power supply
Mains Voltage 115, 230 V ±10 %

Frequency 50-60Hz ± 5 Hz
Mains Cable Length 3 meters
Mains Plug:
115 V Hospital Grade Type IEC83 A5-15
230 V IEC 83 C4
Fuses:
F3 10 AT (115 and 230V)
F4 10 AT (115 and 230V)
F5 10 AT (115 and 230V)
Mains voltage is fed to an AC/DC converter. mains directly. Consequently, in this case two
The AC/DC converter supplies the DC/DC units mains cables are required: one is connected
in the fluid monitor and in the blood monitor between the power unit and the power supply
respectively with supply voltage (+24 V). and one is connected between the power unit
and the fluid monitor.
A mains transformer and a stabilizer provide
the power control logic in the blood monitor In a mains power failure situation, the AK 200
with necessary supply voltage (+12 V). gives an intermittent buzzer alarm and is
disconnected from the +24 V supply by means
The power supply also supplies the heater rods of signal REMO. Signal REMO is obtained
in the fluid monitor with their supply voltage from the power control logic in the blood moni-
(mains). If the power supply is of 115 V type, tor.
the heater rods must be supplied from the

Monitor Stand
Electrical operated
Height adjustable
6
4
Monitor Stand
1. Infusion pole 5. Screws for locking the handle (service frame)
2. Height adjustment for infusion pole 6. Power supply cord
3. Lockable wheels 7. Control for height adjustment
4. Trays for concentrate containers


Chapter 6
Technical data and specifications

Performance and specification - Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2
Blood Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2
Air Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3
Heparin Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3
Blood Volume Sensor (BVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3
Blood Pressure Monitor (BPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3
Dialysis fluid preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Dialysis fluid preparation (BiCart Select mode only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Ultrafiltration control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Substitution fluid (Low volume HDF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Profiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Diascan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Disinfection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Water supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Connection of external equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Battery Back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:12
Performance and specification - Supervisory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Blood Pressure Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Air Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
Heparin Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
Dialysis fluid preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
Dialysis fluid preparation (BiCart Select mode only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
Ultrafiltration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15
Substitution fluid (Low volume HDF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15
Blood leak detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15
Physical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:16
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:16
Materials in contact with water, concentrates and dialysis fluid . . . . . . . . . 6:17
Polymers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:17
Metals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:17
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:17
Environmental data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:18
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:18
Transportation and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:18
Electromagnetic environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:18
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:22
HCEN9287 Revision.02.2006
Program version 8.xx AK 200 S Service manual - Technical data and specifications 6:1
Performance and specification - Control
System
Note
• When accuracy ranges are written as e.g. “(±1 ml/min or ±1%)” the
widest range is valid.
• For the qualified technician the AK 200 S Service Manual is available.

The Service Manual provides all the necessary information for the
safe and required maintenance of the machine.
Note
Blood Flow Control

Values for the blood pump(s) are based on the arterial blood pump with a
pump segment of 7.9 mm and 2.0 mm wall thickness. It is possible to
preset the machine so the blood flow values are based only on the blood
pump rotations. For paediatric blood tubes with pump segment of 4.0
mm it is also possible to set blood flow to 10 or 15 ml/min. Accuracy
is then ±5 ml/min.
Double Needle
Blood Flows in HD, single 20 to 500 ml/min (±10 ml/min or ±15%)

pump:
Blood Flows in Low volume 20 to 500 ml/min (±10 ml/min or ±15%)
HDF:
Accumulated blood volume: 0 to 327 litres (±0.6 l * treatment time (h)
or ±15%)
Single Needle Single Pump
Arterial flow: 20 to 500 ml/min (±10 ml/min or ±18%)

Time control: 2 to 20 sec (±1 sec), Arterial and venous
time. The actual clamp opening time is
depending on blood flow rate, size of
expansion chamber and pressure limits.
Pressure control: 10 to 600 mmHg (±50 mmHg), venous
pressure control
Accumulated blood volume: 0 to 327 litres (±0.6 l * treatment time (h)
or ±18%)
Single Needle Double Pump (HD only)
Double pump-A 20 to 800 ml/min

Double pump-V 20 to 800 ml/min
Mean Flow-SN/DP 10 to 400 ml/min (±10 ml or ±15%)
Accumulated blood volume 0 to 99.9 litres (±0.6 l * treatment time (h)
or ±15%)
Stroke Volume-SN/DP 20 to 60 ml/stroke (±15%) at a cycle time
< 20 s
6:2 AK 200 S Service manual - Technical data and specifications Program version 8.xx
Air Detection
Sensitivity Bubbles larger than 1 µl will be trapped by
the drip chamber. An alarm will be issued
if the blood level falls below the middle of
the air detector.
Venous drip chamber size 22 mm
(diameter)
Heparin Administration
Heparinization 0/0.5 to 10 ml/h (±1 ml or 0.2 ml *
heparinization time (h) or ±5%)
Stop time, can be preset 0 to 4.00 h.min (±1 min) (20 min)
(Default)
Syringe size, can be preset 6 to 30 ml (30 ml)
(Default)
Maximum counter pressure +650 mmHg
The accuracy is based on tests with 20 ml and 30 ml syringes
Blood Volume Sensor (BVS)

Relative blood volume - 40% to + 10% from reference value
∆BV (Standard deviation ±3%) Sensor active for
Hb ≥ 80 g/l and blood flow ≥180 ml/min
Blood Pressure Monitor (BPM)

The alarm limits below can be preset. The value put in brackets and in
italics is the default value.
Systolic pressure range1 60 - 250 mmHg

Low alarm limit 60 - 250 mmHg (100 mmHg)
High alarm limit 60 - 250 mmHg (150 mmHg)
Diastolic pressure range1 40 - 200 mmHg
Mean pressure range1 45 - 235 mmHg
Pulse rate range 40 - 200 bpm (±2 bpm or ±2 % of reading)
Low alarm limit 40 - 180 bpm (40 bpm)
High alarm limit 40 - 180 bpm (150 bpm)
1 Meets ANSI/AAMI SP-10 (1992). Mean error ±5 mmHg. Standard

deviation 8 mmHg
Dialysis fluid preparation
Temperature
Dialysis Fluid Temperature 30-39 °C (+0,5/-1,5 °C) (+0,5/-2,0 °C)

with UFD-kit at fluid flow < 500 ml/min.
Accuracy is valid only if dialysis fluid
temperature is greater or equal to ambient
temperature.
Temperature low alarm, can 28 to 40 °C (35°)
be preset (Default)
Temperature high alarm, can 28 to 40 °C (39°)
be preset (Default)
Fluid flow
Dialysis Fluid Flow Rate 300 to 700 ml/min (±10 ml/min)
Conductivity
Conductivity measuring 0.1 - 20 mS/cm (±0.1 mS/cm)

Alarm limits in Acetate ±5 % of set value
mode
Alarm limit in Bicarbonate ±5% of set value for A-step conductivity
mode, A-step
Alarm Limit in Bicarbonate ±5% of set value for B-step conductivity
mode, B-step
Alarm limits are extended to 10% for maximum 2 minutes of 10 minutes
Concentration
Na+, Acetate mode 115 to 160 mmol/l (±4 mmol/l)

Na+, Bicarbonate mode 130 to 150 mmol/l (±6 mmol/l)
HCO3-, Bicarbonate mode 20 to 40 mmol/l (±6 mmol/l)
Concentrates
Max. pressure for concen- +50 kPa

trates
pH supervision
pH measurement of Dialysis 1 to 9.9 pH units (±0,2 pH units)

Fluid
pH low alarm, can be preset 1 to 15 pH units (6 Acetate mode, 6.5 Bicarb
(Default) mode)
pH high alarm, can be preset 1 to 15 pH units (8 Acetate mode, 7.8 Bicarb
(Default) mode)
Degassing
Degassing pressure in -700 to -500 mmHg (±30 mmHg) (-630

Acetate mode, can be preset mmHg) Minimum 75 mmHg absolute
(Default) pressure
Degassing pressure in -700 to -500 mmHg (±30 mmHg) (-580
Bicarbonate mode, can be mmHg) Minimum 75 mmHg absolute
preset (Default) pressure
Dialysis fluid preparation (BiCart Select mode only)

Fluid flow
SelectBag Proportioning 1:400 (±3%)

Ratio SelectBag Proportioning Ratio is defined
as the quotient SelectBag flow/dialysis
fluid flow
Ultrafiltration control
UF volume max. 30 litres (±50 ml or ±50 ml * passed
treatment time (h) or ±2.5%)
UF-rate 0.0 to 4.0 l/h
Treatment Time 0.05 to 9.59 hour.minute (±1 minute)
Substitution fluid (Low volume HDF)

Substitution fluid flow rate 1.0 to 2.0 l/h (±10%)
Profiling
UF-rate 0 to 4 l/h
Na+, Acetate mode 115 to 160 mmol/l
Na+, Bicarbonate mode 130 to 150 mmol/l
HCO3-, Bicarbonate mode 20 to 40 mmol/l
Half-times:
Degressive Set in h.min, 10 to 25% of remaining

treatment time
Progressive Set in h.min, 75 to 90% of remaining
treatment time
Diascan
Accuracy is valid in HD double needle and on-line HDF postdilution, for
blood flows 200 to 500 ml/min and fluid flows 500 to 700 ml/min, UF
profiling is allowed.
Clearance, K 0 to 350 ml/min (±10%)

Cumulated water volume 0 to 100 l (±10%)
cleared of urea, Kt
Dialysis dose, Kt/V 0 to 3 (±10%)
Plasma sodium, Na+ 130 to 160 mmol/l
Disinfection and Cleaning

Temperature and time in different phases and concentration of
disinfectant are possible to preset. The values in this specification are
the default values and what the machine has been validated against.
Follow the instructions from the manufacturer of the disinfectant, to
set the correct dilution and dwell time. All disinfection programs in the
AK 200 S are tested in accordance with the French standard NFS 90-304
and established to fulfil the requirements expressed in the same standard.
Time for disinfection programs is estimated and may vary.
Heat disinfection Program
Temperature 93 °C
Fill up phase 10 minutes (13 minutes with UFD-kit,
(optional))
Circulation phase 15 minutes
Drain phase 4 minutes
Total time 29 minutes (32 minutes with UFD-kit,
(optional))
Heat disinfection Program with CleanCart
Decalcification CleanCart-C
Cleaning CleanCart-A
Temperature 93 °C
Fill up and mixing phase 12 minutes (13 minutes with UFD-kit,
(optional))
Rinse/Drain phase 5 minutes (15 minutes with UFD-kit,
(optional))
(optional))
Heat disinfection Program with liquid citric acid
Temperature 93 °C
Concentration 20 % citric acid
Concentration in machine 2 % citric acid; i.e. diluted 1 + 9
Consumption Approx. 200 ml
(Approx. 230 ml with UFD-kit, (optional))
Fill up and mixing phase 15 minutes
(18 minutes with UFD-kit, (optional))
Rinse/Drain phase 13 minutes
Total time 43 minutes
Heat disinfection Program with WRO 300 H
Temperature 93 °C
Fill up phase 10 minutes (13 minutes with UFD-kit,
(optional))
Low flow heat phase 20 minutes
Drain phase 4 minutes
(optional))
Peracetic Acid Program
Concentration of disinfec- 3.5 % peracetic acid

tant
Concentration in machine 0.1 %; i.e. diluted 1 + 34
(Approx. 75 ml with UFD-kit, (optional))
Dwell time 10 minutes
Total time 48 minutes including 10 min dwell time
(73 minutes including 10 min dwell time
with UFD-kit, (optional))
Low concentration Peracetic Acid Program
Concentration of disinfec- 0.35 % peracetic acid

tant (0.35 % peracetic acid with UFD-kit,
(optional))
Concentration in machine 0.01 % ; i.e. diluted 1 + 34
(0.01 % ; i.e. diluted 1 + 34 with UFD-kit,
(optional))
Consumption approx. 65 ml
(approx. 75 ml with UFD-kit, (optional))
Hypochlorite Program
Concentration of disinfec- 0.5% available chlorine (approximately 70%

tant of sodium hypochlorite concentration)
Concentration in machine 0.5% ; i.e. not diluted
(Approx. 2500 ml with UFD-kit,
(optional))
Dwell time 10 minutes, Maximum 20 min
Formaldehyde Program
Concentration of disinfec- 4% formaldehyde

tant
Concentration in machine 4% ; i.e. not diluted
(optional))
Central Disinfection Program
Concentration of disinfec- 0.1% peracetic acid or 0.5% available

tant chlorine
Concentration in machine Not diluted
(optional))
Dwell time Must be preset, maximum 20 min. for
hypochlorite
Total time 35 minutes (dwell time not included)
(66 minutes (dwell time not included) with
UFD-kit, (optional))
Other programs, total time
Rinse/Drain with CleanCart 31 min (32 min with UFD-kit, (optional))

Rinse/Drain 12 min (13 min with UFD-kit, (optional))
Drain 4 min
External Cleaning 70% ethanol or 60% Isopropanol
Water supply
Water Supply Flow Rate
Treatment 300 to 750 ml/min
Disinfection 0 to 1150 ml/min
Inlet Water Pressure
to regulator 120 to 800 kPa
to machine 85 to 120 kPa
Inlet Water Temperature
Treatment +5 to +30 °C
Disinfection +5 to +90 °C
Inlet Water Quality Inlet water quality must comply with local
regulations and if no such regulation is
available follow ISO 13959. Level for
conductivity shall not exceed 0.1 mS/cm.
It is possible to use water with higher
conductivity if it consists mainly of sodium
salts. This may however affect the accuracy
of the fluid composition.
Inlet tube length Maximum 5 m or the specially designed
spiral PEX tubing
Drain
Drain (length of tube) Maximum 5 m
Drain capacity Minimum 1.0 l/min
Drain outlet Maximum 1.2 m above floor
If the optional air-gap on the machine is used the distance between the
air-gap and the drain must not be less than 0.3 m. For an electrically
adjustable stand in its lowest position this means that the drain must not
be higher than 580 mm. For a mechanically adjustable stand in its lowest
position the drain must not be higher than 550 mm.
Power supply
Mains Voltage 115; 230 V AC (±10%)
Frequency 50 to 60 Hz (±5 Hz)
Power Consumption Max. 2250 W at 230 V
Max. 1650 W at 115 V
Cable: 3 conductor cable, Length max. 3 m rating
250 V 10 A
Connector: Certified to IEC 320/C13.
Mains plug: Earthed plug, 250 V AC / 10 -16 A,
approved or Hospital grade, earthed plug,
125 V AC / 15 A, approved.
Earth Leakage Current max 500 µA, typical <100 µA (115 V), max
500 µA, typical <145 µA (230 V)
Patient Leakage Current max 100 µA, typical <10 µA (115 V), max
100 µA, typical <10 µA (230 V)
Fuses 2 x T 12 A
All leakage currents are specified without external equipment connected
to the machine.
Connection of external equipment

External equipment intended for connection to signal input, signal
output or other connectors, shall comply with relevant IEC standard
(e.g. IEC 60950 for IT equipment and the IEC 60601 series for medical
electrical equipment). In addition, all such combinations - systems -
shall comply with the standard IEC 60601-1-1, Safety requirements for
medical electrical systems. Equipment not complying to IEC 60601 shall be
kept outside the patient environment, as defined in the standard. (The
normal distance can be mentioned i.e. at least 1.5 m from the patient or
the patient support.) Any person who connects external equipment to
signal input, signal output or other connectors has formed a system and
is therefore responsible for the system to comply with the requirements
of IEC 60601-1-1. If in doubt, contact qualified technician or your local
representative. Use of other cables may result in increased emissions or
decreased immunity for the equipment or system. Protective caps shall
be attached when the connectors are not in use.
External serial interface:
External connector P 63 : 8 pin REDEL contact, black. RS-232

or RS-422 compatible connection.
Opto insulated fulfilling IEC 60601-1-1.
Attached cable length 2.5 m unshielded.
External equipment: Serial port for connection to PC used for
logging and preset.
RS-232
Max input voltage: ± 15 V DC

High level min output + 5 V DC
voltage:
Low level max output - 5 V DC
voltage:
Max output current: ± 5 mA
RS-422
Max input voltage: ± 7 V DC

Diff. input threshold ± 0.2 V DC
voltage:
Diff. max. output voltage: 5 V DC
Diff. min. output voltage: 2 V DC
Short circuit output current: 100 mA
External interface:
External connector P 79 : 8 pin REDEL, yellow, configured as 1

make- and 2 change over- relay contacts.
Attached cable length 2.9 m unshielded.
External equipment: Port for connection to central alarm system
and remote control of water system.
Contact ratings:
Max voltage: 24 V AC or DC
Max current: 100 mA AC or DC
External I/O Interface
External connector P 76: 8 pin REDEL blue. Opto insulated

fulfilling IEC 60601-1-1. Attached cable
length 1,5 m unshielded.
External equipment: Connection to Gambro UF Calibration
Unit. Service purpose only.
External interface:
External connector P 64: 8 pin REDEL, grey. Attached cable length

2.0 m unshielded.
External equipment: Service purpose only.
Battery Back-up
Battery back-up of power 24 volt, 6.5 Ah
supply
Running time >15 minutes
Fuse T 15 A
Performance and specification - Supervisory
system
Note
• When accuracy ranges are written as e.g. “(±1 ml/min or ±1%)” the
widest range is valid.
Note
Blood Pressure Supervision

The alarm limits below can be preset. The value put in brackets and in
italics is the default value.
Venous Pressure
Operating range -700 to +750 mmHg

(±10% at -700 to -500 mmHg)
(±5 mmHg or 3% at -500 to +500 mmHg)
(±10% at +500 to +750 mmHg)
Alarm limit HIGH max +600 mmHg (+300 mmHg)
Alarm limit LOW min -50 mmHg (-50 mmHg)
When blood is detected the operator is
requested to centralize the alarm limits
and the low limit is by default set to +10
mmHg
Arterial Pressure

(±10% at -700 to -500 mmHg)
(±5 mmHg or 3% at -500 to +500 mmHg)
(±10% at +500 to +750 mmHg)
Alarm limit HIGH max +750 mmHg (+250 mmHg)
Alarm limit LOW min. -700 mmHg (-250 mmHg)
System Pressure

(±10% at -700 to -500 mmHg)
(±5 mmHg or 3% at -500 to +500 mmHg)
(±10% at +500 to +750 mmHg)
Alarm limit SN/DP HIGH +300 mmHg (+175 mmHg)
max
Alarm limit SN/DP LOW -200 mmHg (+10 mmHg)
min.
Alarm limit SP HIGH max +750 mmHg (+150 mmHg)
Alarm limit SP LOW min. -
Alarm limit Low-Volume +750 mmHg (+150 mmHg)
HDF HIGH max
Alarm limit Low-Volume -300 mmHg (+100 mmHg)
HDF LOW min
Air Detection
Sensitivity Bubbles larger than 1 µl will be trapped by
the drip chamber. An alarm will be issued
if the blood level falls below the middle of
the air detector.
Venous drip chamber size 22 mm
(diameter)
Heparin Administration
Heparinization volume ±0.3 ml of set value (±1 ml or 0.2 ml *
alarm limit heparinization time (h) or ±5%)
The accuracy is based on tests with 20 ml and 30 ml syringes
Dialysis fluid preparation

Temperature
Temperature alarm (fixed) 40 °C (±1 °C)
Conductivity
Alarm limits in Acetate ±5% of set value

mode
Alarm Limit in Bicarbonate ±5% of set value for A-step conductivity
mode, A-step
Alarm Limit in Bicarbonate ±5% of set value for B-step conductivity
mode, B-step
Alarm limits are temporarily extended to 10%. Maximum mean deviation
for a 5 hour treatment is 0.2 mS/cm.
Dialysis fluid preparation (BiCart Select mode only)

Dialysis Fluid Flow Rate 300 - 700 ml/min (±9 ml/min)
Dialysis Fluid Flow Rate ±5%
alarm limit
SelectBag Proportioning 1:400 ±12%, alarm given within 20
Ratio alarm limit minutes. For larger errors the alarm time
is shorter.
SelectBag Proportioning Ratio is defined
as the quotient SelectBag flow/dialysis
fluid flow
Ultrafiltration
Dialysis fluid flow operating 300 - 700 ml/min
range
UF rate supervision -4.0 to +4.0 l/h (±2 ml/min) Accuracy ±5
ml/min verified at start-up.
UF rate supervision, max ±1-10 ml/min, (±5 ml/min)
allowed difference between
control and protective
system, can be preset
(Default)
Accumulated UF volume ±0.10 - 2.0 l (±0.80 l) or ±0.10 l/h * passed
alarm limit, can be preset treatment time (h)
(Default)
Treatment Time Control 0.05 to 9.59 hour.minute (±1 minute)
TMP supervision alarm -200 to +550 mmHg (±15 mmHg)
For AK 200 S, TMP is defined as the
difference, Pb out - Pd out, where Pb out
is the venous drip chamber pressure and
Pd out is the pressure measured in the
dialysis fluid, where it enters the machine
after the dialyzer.
Substitution fluid (Low volume HDF)

Infusion volume supervision ±15% of calculated volume (±10%)
alarm
Blood leak detection

Sensitivity ≥0.35 ml blood/min, haematocrit 32%
±2%, at 700 ml/min dialysis fluid flow rate
Alarm response time 7 seconds
(diffusion mode)
Physical data
Depth Approx. 610 mm

Width Approx. 570 mm
Total Height Adjustable heights 1175-1340 mm
Five position stand 1152 - 1382 mm
Floor Area 573 x 753 mm
Weight Blood Monitor Approx. 17 kg
Weight Fluid Monitor Approx. 40 kg
Weight Stand Approx. 24 to 31 kg
Infusion Stand Height 1300 to 2150 mm
Max. load 10 kg
Transportation One man installation
Fitting into a normal Estate car
References
Assembly Drawing: K22100
Materials in contact with water, concentrates
and dialysis fluid
Polymers
Silicon rubber
Santroprene
PVC (Polyvinylchloride)
PEEK (Polyetherketone)
PEX (Polyethylene)
PP (Polypropylene)
PP (Polypropylene reinforced with talcum)
PSU (Polysulphone)
PVDF (Polyvinylidene fluoride)
PTFE (Polytetrafluoro ethylene)
Metals
Stainless steel SS2343
Titanium
Platinum
Others
Carbon
Ceramic, Steatite 221
Ceramic, Aluminium oxide (Al2O3)
Ceramic, Zirconium oxide (ZrO2)
Glass
Ferrite (Barium-Strontium- Ferrit)
Environmental data
Operation
If condensation occur when moving the equipment between locations
with different temperatures and high relative humidity (e.g. outdoor and
indoor locations), the inside of the equipment shall be allowed to dry
before switching on the equipment.
Ambient Temperature range +18 to +35 °C

Relative Humidity range 15 to 85% RH
Air Pressure range (atm. 700 to 1060 hPa
pressure)
Maximum altitude ≈ 2000 m above see level
Transportation and storage

During transportation and storage the equipment has to be kept in its
original packing. If transportation or storage time is more than 15 weeks,
the environmental data relating to the operation has to be followed. The
maximum ambient temperature for transportation and storage in 96%
Relative humidity is +40 °C.
Ambient Temperature range -20 to +70 °C

Relative Humidity range 10 to 96% RH
Air Pressure range (atm. 500 to 1060 hPa
pressure)
Electromagnetic environment
The AK 200 S is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment
specified below. The customer or the user of the AK 200 S should assure
that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment – guidance

RF emissions Group 1 The AK 200 S uses RF energy only for its internal
CISPR 11 function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low
and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby
electronic equipment
RF emissions Class B The AK 200 S is suitable for use in all establishments,
CISPR 11 including domestic establishments and those directly
connected to the public low-voltage power supply
network that supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes
Harmonic emissions Class A (Not applicable
IEC 61000-3-2 for 115 V version)
Voltage fluctuations Complies (Not
/flicker emissions applicable for 115 V
IEC 61000-3-3 version)
Immunity test IEC 60601 Compliance level Electromagnetic enviroment-guidance
test level
Electrostatic ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic
discharge (ESD), ±8 kV Air ±8 kV Air tile. If floors are covered with synthetic
IEC 61000-4-2 material, the relative humidity should be at
least 30 %.
Electrical fast ±2 kV for power ±2 kV for power Mains power quality should be that
transient/burst, lines lines of a typical commercial or hospital
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1kV for ±1kV for environment.
input/output lines input/output lines
Surge ±1kV for ±1kV for Mains power quality should be that of a
IEC 61000-4-5 differential mode differential mode typical commercial or hospital environment
±2kV for ±2kV for common
common mode mode
Voltage <5 % UT <5 % UT Mains power quality should be that
dips, short (>95 % dip in UT) (>95 % dip in UT) of a typical commercial or hospital
interruptions and for 0,5 cycle for 0,5 cycle environment. If the user of the AK 200 S
voltage variations 40 % UT 40 % UT requires continued operation during power
on power supply (60 % dip in UT) (60 % dip in UT) mains interruptions, it is recommended
input lines. for 5 cycles for 5 cycles that the AK 200 S be powered from an
IEC 61000-4-11 70 % UT 70 % UT uninterruptible power supply or a battery.
(30 % dip in UT) (30 % dip in UT)
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles
<5 % UT <5 % UT
(>95 % dip in UT) (>95 % dip in UT)
for 5 sec for 5 sec
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should
(50/60 Hz) be at levels characteristic of a typical
magnetic field location in a typical commercial or hospital
IEC 61000-4-8 environment.
Note
• UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
Note
Immunity test IEC 60601 Compliance level Electromagnetic enviroment-guidance
test level
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to any
part of the AK 200 S, including cables,
than the recommended separation distance
calculated from the equation applicable to
the frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3V d = 1.2 P
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80
MHz
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m d = 1.2 P 80 MHz to 800
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2,5
d = 2.3 P 800 MHz to 2,5 GHz
GHz
Radiated RF - 30V/m where P is the maximum output power
mobile phones rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter manufacturer
and d is the recommended separation
distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
as determined by an electromagnetic site
survey2, should be less than the compliance
level in each frequency range3.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
equipment marked with the following
symbol:
Note
• At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
• These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic
propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures,
objects and people.
Note
2 Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio
(cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM
radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To
assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic
site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which
the AK 200 S is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the AK 200 S
should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed,
additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the AK 200 S.
3 Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than
3 V/m.
Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications equipment
and the AK 200 S
The AK 200 S is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances
are controlled. The customer or the user of the AK 200 S can help prevent electromagnetic interference
by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment
(transmitters) and the AK 200 S as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the
communications equipment.
Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
output power of (m)
transmitter
W
150kHz - 80MHz 80MHz - 800MHz 800MHz - 2500MHz
 3,5   3,5  7
d =  P d =  P d=  P
 3  3  3
0,01 0.11 0.11 0.23

0,1 0.37 0.37 0.74
1 1.2 1.2 2.3

10 3.7 3.7 7.4
100 12 12 23
Rated maximum - - 7
d=  P
output power of  30 
mobile phone
2W - - 0.33
GSM/3G
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d
in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is
the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
Note
• At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher
frequency range applies.
• These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic

propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures,
objects and people.
Note
Standards
The machine complies with the following standards:
IEC 60601-1 General requirements for safety, Class I, type B
IEC 60601-2-16 Particular requirements for safety of haemodialysis,

haemodiafiltration and haemofiltration equipment
IEC 60601-2-30 Particular requirements for the safety of automatic

cycling indirect blood pressure monitoring equipment
IEC 60601-1-2 Electromagnetic compatibility
EN 1060-1 Non-invasive sphygmomanometers Part 1: General

requirements
EN 1060-3 Non-invasive sphygmomanometers Part 3: Supplementary

requirements for electromechanical blood pressure measuring systems
NFS 90-304 Medico-surgical equipment Hemodialysis equipment
Spare Parts List
AK 200 S & AK 200 ULTRA S
June 2005
Item Denomination Order no. Remarks
Contents:
Fluid Monitor Monitor Stand
AK 200 S, FM-valves ........................................ 7-1 Monitor stand MS 200 ...................................... 7-36
Flow output pump ............................................ 7-2 AC/DC unit ....................................................... 7-37
Flow input pump .............................................. 7-3
Degassing pump ............................................... 7-4 AK 200 ULTRA S unique parts
Water inlet, Heat exchanger ........................... 7-5 AK 200 ULTRA S, FM-valves .......................... 7-38
Non-return valve, inlet nipples ....................... 7-39
FM, rear components ....................................... 7-6 Internal pressure regulator, infusion port ...... 7-40
Conductivity cells, Bubble chamber ................. 7-7 Ultrafilter holder .............................................. 7-41
Heating vessel, Degassing chamber ................ 7-8 Water inlet-, drain-connections ....................... 7-42
Mixing chamber ................................................ 7-9
UF measuring unit ........................................... 7-10 Collection of parts:
Printed circuit boards ...................................... 7-43
Bypass unit ....................................................... 7-11
Cablings ............................................................ 7-44
Valve units, ZEVA,TAVA, Deairating chamb .. 7-12
Tubes and silicone connectors ......................... 7-45
Safety bypass unit, Dia connectors,
PEX tubes ......................................................... 7-46
Blood leak detector. ......................................... 7-13
Bottom box ....................................................... 7-14
Air gap, optional ............................................... 7-15
Reducer unit 1, PBVA ...................................... 7-16

Feeding pumps ................................................. 7-17
FM covers, mounting plates ............................ 7-18
Top priming ...................................................... 7-19
Dialyser holder ................................................. 7-20
BiCart holder .................................................... 7-21

BiCart Select: components .............................. 7-22
BiCart Select: SelectCart holder ..................... 7-23
BiCart Select: SelectBag holder ...................... 7-24
UFD, optional ................................................... 7-25
Diascan, optional .............................................. 7-26
Blood Monitor
Blood pump ....................................................... 7-27
Blood pump motor unit .................................... 7-28
Operator's Panel ............................................... 7-29
BM components ................................................ 7-30
BM cover ........................................................... 7-31
Heparin pump ................................................... 7-32

Magnetic clamp unit ......................................... 7-33
Level regulation, air detector .......................... 7-34
Pressure transducer ......................................... 7-35

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7- 1 FM, Valves
FOVA DRVA
EVVA
ZEVA
EMVA
BYVA,DIVA
TAVA
PAVA BCVA
PBVA
TPVA
LDVA

INVA FLVA RFVA HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7 - 1 Spare Part List

1 BCVA K15235A
2 Solenoid valve K15035001
3 BCVA complete K15078001 incl. 1,2
4 BYVA K15235A
6 BYVA complete K20248001 incl. 4,5+7,8
7 DIVA K15235A
9 DIVA complete K20248001 incl. 7,8+4,5
10 DRVA K15235A
12 DRVA complete K15078001 incl. 10,11
13 EMVA K21139002
15 EMVA complete K15285004 incl. 13,14
16 EVVA K15619A
18 EVVA complete K15623001 incl. 16,17
19 FLVA K16007B
21 FLVA complete K21348001 incl. 19,20
22 FOVA K15235A
24 FOVA complete K15622001 incl. 22,23
25 INVA K15996A
27 INVA complete K21349001 incl. 25,26
28 LDVA K15235A
30 LDVA complete K21771001 incl. 28,29
31 RFVA K15235A
33 RFVA complete K15078001 incl. 31,32
34 TAVA K15235A
36 TAVA complete K15078001 incl. 34,35
37 TPVA K15235A
39 TPVA complete see reducer unit, 7-16
40 PAVA K21139002
42 PAVA complete K15285004 incl. 40,41

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7- 1 FM, Valves
FOVA DRVA
EVVA
ZEVA
EMVA
BYVA,DIVA
TAVA
PAVA BCVA
PBVA
TPVA
LDVA

INVA FLVA RFVA HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

43 PBVA K15235A
45 PBVA complete K15078001 incl. 43,44
46 ZEVA K15235A
48 ZEVA complete K15078001 incl. 46,47

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7- 2 Flow output pump
11,12,13,26 23
5,8,21
1 25
2,14 234
88
3 4,9
6 23487
7 10
24
3
15
18
16 22
20
19 17

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Flow Restrictor K11740001
2 Valve unit K15078001
3 Screw 100378408
4 Pressure transducer K21400001
5 Pressure transducer housing K14041001
6 Washer K19013001
7 Screw 100369360
8 O-ring 100319007
9 O-ring 100319029
10 Valve solenoid K15035001
11 Valve housing, complete K15235A

12 Nut 100316082
13 Screw 100378325
14 Screw 100378304
15 Nipple K14158001
16 O-ring 100319056
17 Motor K18472A
18 Pump complete K40124001
19 Gasket K13572001
20 End bracket K13429A
21 Adapter K22547001
22 Screw 100378430
23 Connector, angled (small) K12951001
24 Tube connector, straight K10986001
25 Connector, T K12961001
26 Membrane K08056C
* Pump head K40123001 incl. pump+driving magnet

* Pump repair kit K20654003

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7- 3 Flow input pump
9,10,11,12 4
1
2,15
3 18,19,20
3
16
17 8
14 6
13
7 5

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Flow restrictor K11740001
3 Screw 100378408
4 Differential pressure transducer K40132001
5 Motor K18472A
6 Pump complete K40124001

7 Gasket K13572001
10 Nut 100316082
11 Screw 100378325
12 Membrane K08056C
14 Screw 100378430
15 Screw 100378304
16 Nipple K14158001
17 O-ring 100319056
19 Nipple K01515002
20 Compressing gland K14540002

Note!
For machines without Differential Pressure Transducer;
- AK 200 S with serial number below 14265
- AK 200 ULTRA S with a serial number below 12108
refer to AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S Spare Parts List, HCEN9288,
Revision 02.2003.

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7- 4 Degassing pump
23
10,11,12,13 4,7,21
5 1,14
6
2
24 9
3,8
15
18
16 22
20
19 17

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

2 Screw 100378408
3 Pressure transducer K21400001
4 Pressure transducer housing K14041001
5 Washer K19013001
6 Srew 100369360
7 O-ring 100319007
8 O-ring 100319029
11 Nut 100316082
12 Screw 100378325
13 Membrane K08056C
14 Screw 100378304
15 Nipple K14158001
16 O-ring 100319056
17 Motor K18472A
18 Pump, complete K40124001
19 Gasket K13572001
22 Screw 100378430


HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-5 Water inlet, Heat exchanger
14
15
16
17
1,4
2,3
5
6,7
8,9
12
11
13
10

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

2 Connector straight K10986001
3 Flow reducer K11740001
4 Screw 100378304
5 Screw 100378408
6 Nut 100316082
7 Membrane K08056C
8 Screw 100378325
9 Screw 100378330
10 Tube 100312093
11 Clamp 100334203
12 T-connector K12961001
13 Nipple K19219001
14 Clamp 100314177
15 Heat exchanger K15876005
16 Screw 100378610
17 O-ring 100319042 Between heat exchanger halves
Note! For AK 200 ULTRA S, also see 7-39

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-6 FM, rear components
30,34 28
31 29
32
1-11
13
12
14
33, 35
15-20 21-26 27

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 pH-electrode K12299001
2 Tube connector, straight K10986001
3 Screw 100378410
4 Washer K09974001
5 Screw 100366308
6 Shielding box K11883001

7 Screw 100369314
8 Toothed locking washer 100322010
9 O-ring K14686001
10 Protective cover pH K18829001
11 Dummy K13884001 pH
12 Cover, Relay Unit K21205001
13 Screw 100370412
14 Label 100340011
15 Screw 100370406
16 Fan with contact K18469A

17 Holder, fan K11750001
18 Screw 100372606
19 Guiding bracket K16363001
20 Strap 100314015 for cable from fan
21 Screw 100378420
22 Locking washer 100322011
23 Nut 100390400
24 Washer 100392902
25 Washer 100322005
26 Earth label 100340001

27 Cable stand, 115 V K23862001
28 Run time meter K13800001
29 Screw 100378406
30 BPM K40128002 Program version 7.21 or higher is
required
31 Screw 100378406
32 Screw 100378306
33 BPM connector 100334255
34 Plate K21199001
35 Cover plug 100316316
* pH sensor, compl. K11721002 excl. pH-electrode

* Relay unit, compl. K40120002
* Board holder left K18778001
* Board holder right K18779001
* Screw 100378408 Board holder

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-7 Conductivity cells, Bubble chamber
6
5
2 1,3 4

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Conductivity cell, compl. K40103002
2 Connector angled K12951001
3 Fluid protection K22527001
4 Screw 100370408
5 Bubble chamber K22551001
6 Silicone tube 2x1,5 100312166

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-8 Heating vessel, Degassing chamber
19
6 20 25
6
2 26
27
5 6
16 28
18 23
24
12
50 1
3
5 34 35
22
4
21 6
1 32
15 36
49
2 7 29
8 30
9
37
10
38
39
40
11
13 41 17
12 6 44
14 45
46
43
48
42
24
47

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Tube 100312012 state lenght
2 Connector, straight K10986001
3 Particle, filter K14944001
5 Connector straight K12961002
6 PT-screw 100369360
7 Top cover, complete K15107C
8 O-ring 100319054
9 Tube K14363001
10 Chamber K14711002
11 O-ring 100319046
12 Screw 100378406
13 Washer K06180001
14 Level transducer K11845A
15 Heating vessel K13566B
16 Heating unit, compl. K18171003 230 V, 004= 115V

17 Inlet unit, compl. K08062003
18 Protection R00103001
19 Level detector, compl. K40135001
20 O-ring 100319038
21 Temp. transducer, compl. K11849C

22 O-ring 100319029
23 Nipple K09060001
24 O-ring 100319027
25 Stirrer K23514001
26 Ring K13565001
27 O-ring K13582001
28 Holder K13564001
29 Spacer K11875001
30 Screw 100372616
31 Transm. board, tube sensor K18786001

32 Screw 100366306
33 Holder K13568001
34 Gasket K14541001
35 V-ring 100318086
36 Reciv. board, tube sensor K09866004

37 Adjusting screw K08177001
38 Sealing ring K07994001
39 Ring K08227001
40 Screw 100372609
41 Inlet nipple K11021001

42 Clamp 100334203
43 Armoured tube 100312093
44 Holder K04437001
45 O-ring 100319030

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-8 Heating vessel, Degassing chamber
19
6 20 25
6
2 26
27
5 6
16 28
18 23
24
12
50 1
3
5 34 35
22
4
21 6
1 32
36
49 15
2 7 29
8 30
9
10 37
38
39
40
11
13 41 17
12 6 44
14 45
46
43
48
42
24
47

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

46 Cover, bottom K08168001
47 Nut K04620001
48 Screw 100372613
49 Connector, angled K12951001
50 Holder K04786001
* Degassing chamber, compl. K14625001

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-9 Mixing chamber
4
5
2
3

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

2 Nipple K01515002
3 Tube 100312031
4 Screw 100370406
6 Mixing chamber, complete K15083002

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-10 UF measuring unit
10
6
10
4 15
16
11
17
8
13
12
18
3
1
4, 5 13
7
2
14

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Angled connector K11982001
2 Screw 100370312
3 PT-screw 100368410
4 Screw 100370306
5 Toothed lock washer 100322010
6 Spacer K13799001
8 Shielding cover K10701A
10 Cablings K11291001
11 Cabling K11289001
12 Spacer 100316124
13 Carbon connector K21644001
16 Analog Distribution board K40142001

17 20-Amp.board cable K11290001
18 Clip K08502001
* UF measuring unit, compl. K40139001

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-11 Bypass unit
7
18
5
4 15
21
22
6
19 14
20
2
12 3
11
10
18
11
13 10
1
17
8 9
16

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Locking nut 100316082
2 Angle bracket, magnet K15393A
3 Screw 100378304
4 Washer K19013001
5 Pressure transducer, compl. K21400001
6 O-ring 100319007
7 PT-screw 100369360
9 Gasket K14845001
10 Screw 100378325
11 Screw 100378330
13 Valve house, complete K15235A
14 Valve membrane K08056C
16 Gasket K14846001
17 Screw, MCS 4x6 100378408
19 Screw 100378416
20 Pressure transducer house K14041001
21 O-ring 100319029
* Bypass unit, complete K14851003

* Bypass unit, complete K14851002 does not include pos. 4-6,21,22

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-12 ZEVA, TAVA, Deairating chamber
9
27
15
7
9
10,5
2
12
23
26
4,8 14
11
13
16
24
25
6
14 12
18
17
19
1 20
15 9 22
27 14
9
10,5
12
2
21
3
4,8

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

2 Membrane K08056C
3 Screw 100378304
5 Screw 100378325
6 Chamber K14711001
8 Valve cabling K14808001
11 Cover complete K15107A

12 Screw 100378408
13 O-ring 100319054
14 PT-screw 100369360
16 Tube K14363001
17 Washer K19013001
18 O-ring 100319007
19 Pressure transducer complete K21400001
20 O-ring 100319046
21 Level detector K11845A

22 Washer K06180001
23 Tube, santoprene 100312141
25 O-ring 100319029
26 Compressing gland K14540002

27 Screw 100378330
* Valve unit: ZEVA,TAVA,complete K15078001

* Deairating chamber complete K14625003
Note! For AK 200 ULTRA S, also see 7-40

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-13 Safety bypass. ,Dia con., Blood leak detector
16
26
1
7 2 16
3
2
18
8 15,21,22,23,24,24,25
4 17
5 5 6 19,20
27
13
12 14
14
11
10

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Filter housing K13735001
2 Nut 100391003
3 Filter L50824001
4 O-ring 100319046
5 Nut, grey K12990004
6 Filter nipple K13736001

7 Nipple K13739001
8 Nut 100391002
9 Washer K15120001 red
10 Washer K15120002 blue
11 Nipple K14028002
12 Dia connector set K14082002 blue, including item 14
13 Dia connector set K14081002 red, including item 14
14 Locking ring K22591001 5mm from end of tube

19 Safety bypass unit complete K18309002
20 Pressure transducer complete K21400001
21 Housing K14041001
22 PT-screw 100369360
23 O-ring 100319007
24 Washer K19013001
25 O-ring 100319029
26 Blood leakage detector K18310002

27 O-ring 100319009

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-14 Bottom box
10
2
3
4
14
6
7,8
12
7,8
14
11
13

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Pick up tube, blue K13467001 right
Pick up tube, red K13467002 left
2 Cover K11825002
3 O-ring 100318104
4 Screw PT 100368412
5 Nut 100316061
6 Plug 100316275 230V
7 Screw 100316039
8 Screw 100388410
9 O-ring K16214001
10 Blood leak det. cover K16215002 incl. item 9

11 Nipple K15232001
12 Plug 100316274
13 Cuff holder M6957575
14 Potentioal equialization connector 100202724

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-15 Air gap (option)
6 8
4
9
3
10
11
2
12
13
14
15
27
16
26
17
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
22

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Air gap complete K19420002 Option
2 Cover, air gap K19421001
3 Plug 100316274
4 Silencer K22135001
5 Tube no 20262 K20262001
6 Screw 100388612
8 Connector K16273004
9 Screw 100372606
12 Nut K18032001
13 Hose clamp 100334061
14 Clamp 100334217
15 Reinforced PVC tube K03343A L=60 cm
16 Reinforced PVC tube K03343A L=30 cm

17 Plug 100316274
18 Reinforced PVC tube 19,4 x 3,7 mm 100312156 L=50 cm
19 Hose clamp 100334061
20 Joint pipe 100334162
21 Hose clamp 100334059

22 Reinforced PVC tube 13 x 3,5 mm 100312142 L=400 cm
23 Holder K20449001 H=362 mm
24 Holder K20449002 H=650 mm
25 Holder K20449003 H=950 mm
26 Screw 100388640
27 Water brake K11911001

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-16 Reducer unit 1, TPVA
26
12
26
11
12
11
9
14 8
21 18
21
2 19 10
26
7
17 24
19
4
13
19 3, 6
12
21
1
15
19 21
16
23
20
24
25
11

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Motor K13403B
2 Valve house, complete K15235A
3 Valve house spec., complete K15514002
5 Expansion chamber K16884002
6 Spacer K21486001
7 Motor holder K15162001
8 Gasket K15038001
9 Strap 100314015
10 Reducer K12812014

14 PT-screw 100366308
15 Screw 100380304
16 Pin 100320079
17 Screw 100378430
18 Screw 100378304
21 Screw 100378330
22 Screw 100378408
23 Spacer K15049001
24 Washer 100322003
25 Spring 100346054
26 Nipple K01515002
* Reducer unit 1 K15510003

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-17 Feeding pumps
3,9
4
5
2
10
10 1
1
7 8

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Tube, silicone 100312032 state length
2 Screw 100388612
3 Motor unit K14621002 incl. handle wheel, 8-pos. contact
5 Tube, soft 100312012
6 Cable splice K14339001

7 Flexible mounting K02691001
8 Nut 100390400
9 Screw 100370335
10 Tube, silicone 100312166 state length
* Feeding pump, complete K40117001

* Pumphead replacement kit K21095002 incl. item 2
* BiCart Select Feeding pump K14207007

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-18 FM, Covers and mounting plates
25 17
10
16 15
14
12
13
35
35
32 33
4 5
11
23
21
2
22
3
18
20
19
7
34 6
1
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
26 27
HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
8

1 Lead through 100314256 for earth cable to MS 200
2 Cabling support K11561001
3 Edging strip 100312050
4 Bottom box K21799A
4 Bottom box K21813001 AK 200 ULTRA S
5 Patent label K05098001

6 Screw 100378406
7 Screw 100378408
8 Earth cable K18967001
9 Back panel K11838002
10 Air filter K11503001

11 Screw 100378580
12 Faucet K13451001
13 Spring 100346045
14 Pin 100320010
15 Air filter holder K11670001

16 O-ring K11505001
17 Filter holder complete K11504A
18 Rear plate K21253A
19 Bottom plate 1 K21403A
20 Screw 100378410
21 Screw 100378460
22 Fluid protection K18387001 FM/BM
23 Top tray K18253001 included in MS 200 complete
24 Holder K15387001
25 Cover complete K21798A

25 Cover complete K21798B AK 200 ULTRA S
26 Nut 100390400
28 Earth cable K18967001 to BM
29 Earth cable K18967001 to MS 200

30 Earth label 100340001
31 Screw 100378418
32 Label, warning K12136001 115 V
33 Label, C.I.C.E.R K18925001 115 V
34 Support 100314197
35 Screw K18442A
* SelectCart holder, complete K21555003 see 7-23

* Select Bag holder complete K20250001 see 7-24
* BiCart holder complete K22390003 see 7-21

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-19 Top priming
12,13
10
9
14,15
17
6,11,16
7
11
19
1,2,3,4,5
8
7

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
1 Valve house complete K15235A includes item 2-5

2 Nut 100316082
3 Membrane K08056C
4 Screw 100378325
5 Screw 100378330
6 Nipple K01515002
7 Solenoid K15035001
9 Chamber unit complete K21514001
10 Level guard K40135001 for item 9

12 O-ring 100319054
13 PT-screw 100369360
14 Screw 100378425 locking fluid 100 800 043
15 Spacer 100316249
16 Tube santoprene 100312141

17 Filter K16538C
19 Screw 100378406

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-20 Dialyser holder
2
5
6
4 1

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
1 Lundia 11-arm K15541B

2 Shaft K18379001
3 Nut 100316046
4 Knob 100300058
5 Spring 100346026
6 Roll, BSM K12994001

7 Dia. holder complete N01870003

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-21 BiCart holder
3 18
1 12 1 13
15
17
17 Arm, upper
16
4 18
5 14 15
11
8
16
6,9,10
12
12 13
7,9,10
15 13
8 5 12 2
16
2
17 17
Arm, lower
4
14

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
1 Arm, upper K23031001

2 Arm, lower K21557005
3 Sealing K17502001
4 Shaft K17481001
5 Spring K17503001
6 Bypass nipple K14908001

7 BCH bypass valve K14425001
8 Cabling K14910001
9 O-ring 100319026
10 Guide 100330021
11 Tube 100312032
12 Magnet K19049002
14 Concentrate filter K16538C
15 O-ring 100319008
16 O-ring 100319046
17 Tube, silicone 100312032
18 Protective ring K22829001
* BiCart holder complete K22390003

* Mounting screws 100378408
* Spike kit, upper K23031003
* Spike kit, lower K21557006

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-22 BiCart Select: components
13
9
2-6
7
10
14
1 16 15
11 12

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

2 Membrane K08056C
3 Nut 100316082
4 Screw 100378325
5 Screw 100378330
6 Screw 100378304
8 Non return valve K17978001
11 BiCart Select Control pump K14207007

12 BiCart Select Protective pump K14207007
13 Silicone tube 2x1mm 100312031
14 Nipple K01515002
15 Screw 100368001
* Valve and level unit K21770001

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-23 BiCart Select: SelectCart holder
2 3
4
1
6 14 4 2
8
13 Arm, upper
12 7
9
14
10 8
6
7
2
6
8 2
6 7 11
Arm, lower
11

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
1 Shaft K17481001
2 T-Connector K17237001
3 Sealing K19064001
4 Arm, upper K23031001
5 O-ring 100319032
6 Magnet K19049002
7 O-ring 100319046
8 O-ring 100319008
9 Bypass nipple K14908001
10 O-ring 100319026
11 Arm, lower K21557005

12 Washer 100322050
13 Switch + cable K20349001
14 Protective ring K22829001
* BiCart Select holder, complete K21555003

* Spike kit, upper K23031003
* Spike kit, lower K21557006

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-24 BiCart Select: SelectBag holder

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

2 Gasket K18878001
3 Door, complete K20244001
4 Fork K20022001
5 Sealing K22091001
6 Washer K07421001
7 Bypass valve K14425001
8 Connector, L 100334218
* Select Bag holder K20250001

* Select Bag holder, service kit K40121001 incl. spike, spring and tube

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-25 Ultra Filtered Dialysis fluid (optional)
13
8,9,10
2,3
7
4,5,6
11
12

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
1 Filterholder, complete K17724004

2 Valve solenoid K15035001 FIVA
3 Valve solenoid K15035001 TAVA
4 FIVA K15235A
5 TAVA K15235A
6 Membrane K08056C
7 Screw 100378325
8 Nut K18032001
9 Nipple K16273004

13 Label tube connections K18389001
* FIVA and TAVA , complete K18227001

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-26 Diascan, optional
23489
0
21
23
1 50
2178
2
2
21784
3
1
21
23
3
78
21
16
0
13
131

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Conductivity cell complete K40131003
2 Cover K23214001
3 Screw 100378408

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-27 Blood pump
10
2 8
3
9
4,6,7
1
12
11

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Bearing unit, CCW rotation K15610001 incl. item 4,6,7
Bearing unit, CW rotation K15610002 incl. item 4,6,7
2 O-ring 100318112
3 Race with cover K19694A A=arterial B=venous
incl. item 5
4 PT-screw 100368226
5 Cover K19693A A=arterial B=venous
incl. magnet
6 Magnet plate K15662001
7 Rotor guard bord K15670003
8 Screw 100379516
9 Cabling K11405001
10 Cover sensor PCB K20112001
11 Screw 100378416
12 Roller K20891001
* Pump rotor complete K40164001

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-28 Blood pump motor unit
5
3
1
4
2
8 10
7 9
14
6
13 11
12

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
1 Screw 100 370304

2 Protecting cover K11859001
3 Edging strip 100312070
4 Motor, compl. K40168001 incl. transmission
5 Clutch half assembly K04898003 incl. item 14
6 Flexible mounting 100332013

7 Nut M6M4 100390400 locking fluid 100 800 012
8 Motor bracket K11657001
9 Cabling clamp 100314112
10 Clutch insert K04901001
11 Cabling, motor BP K23945001

12 Encoder cable K14140002
13 Screw 100378408
14 Insulating washer K04902001

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-29 Operator's Panel
7 9
8 10
6
1
2
3
4,5

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 CPU holder left K21158001 locking fluid 100 800 043
2 CPU holder right K21159001 locking fluid 100 800 043
3 Screw 100378410
4 Washer 100322011
5 Nut 100390400
6 Bottom plate K21157A

7 Set knob K18670001
8 Blood flow knob K14678C
9 Operators panel K40137001
10 Overlay K23273001 English (AK 200 S)
10 Overlay K23274001 German (AK 200 S)

10 Overlay K23275001 French (AK 200 S)
10 Overlay K23276001 Swedish (AK 200 S)
10 Overlay K23277001 Spanish (AK 200 S)
10 Overlay K23278001 Italian (AK 200 S)
10 Overlay K23279001 Finnish (AK 200 S)

10 Overlay K23280001 Tjeckian (AK 200 S)
10 Overlay K23281001 Danish (AK 200 S)
10 Overlay K23282001 Hungarian (AK 200 S)
10 Overlay K23283001 Portuguese (AK 200 S)
10 Overlay K23284001 Russian (AK 200 S)

10 Overlay K23285001 Serbian (AK 200 S)
10 Overlay K23607001 Polish (AK 200 S)
10 Overlay K23608001 Turkish (AK 200 S)
10 Overlay K23779001 Slovak (AK 200 S)
10 Overlay K23293001 English (AK 200 ULTRA S)

10 Overlay K23294001 German (AK 200 ULTRA S)
10 Overlay K23295001 French (AK 200 ULTRA S)
10 Overlay K23296001 Swedish (AK 200 ULTRA S)
10 Overlay K23297001 Spanish (AK 200 ULTRA S)
10 Overlay K23298001 Italian (AK 200 ULTRA S)

10 Overlay K23299001 Finnish (AK 200 ULTRA S)
10 Overlay K23300001 Tjeckian (AK 200 ULTRA S)
10 Overlay K23301001 Danish (AK 200 ULTRA S)
10 Overlay K23302001 Hungarian (AK 200 ULTRA S)
10 Overlay K23303001 Portuguese (AK 200 ULTRA S)

10 Overlay K23304001 Russian (AK 200 ULTRA S)
10 Overlay K23305001 Serbian (AK 200 ULTRA S)
10 Overlay K23609001 Polish (AK 200 ULTRA S)
10 Overlay K23610001 Turkish (AK 200 ULTRA S)
10 Overlay K23780001 Slovak (AK 200 ULTRA S)
* Mounting screw 100316074 for operator's panel

* Seal K17983001 for operator's panel

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-30 BM components
23 5, 12, 28 2,3
22 4,5
29 6
7, 18 21
15
1
14
12, 13
12, 17
9, 11 9, 30, 31
10 32
8,16
26, 27 26, 27
25
19, 20
12
10
34 33

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Tubing set pressure test K21351A
2 Fan K18469A
3 Guiding cap K13269001
4 Bracket K21168001
5 Gasket K21169001
6 Screw 100372606
7 BYVA Control board K18766001
8 Holder K14893001
9 Rubber foot 100307030
10 Grounding sign 100340001
11 Screw 100378412
12 Screw 100378410
13 Screw 100379412
14 Strap 100314015
15 Label K15818001
16 Screw 100378408
17 Screw 100379412
18 Screw 100379308
19 Screw 100378306
20 Battery cable+holder K19787001
21 Cable BM 200 S 2-4 pole K22659001

23 Valve unit 2 way N. open K18765001
24 Screw 100378406
25 Battery 100224006
26 Pump K21388001
27 Pump tube K22114001
28 BM distribution board K19433002
29 Press. transd. board K21365001
31 Nut 100390400
32 Bottom plate K21157A
33 Fuse cable air pumps K21895001
34 Fuse cable 1 air pump K21919001

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-31 BM cover
1
7 11
9
8
10
15
14,16,17
13
4
6
5
3
12 2
18, 19

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 BM cover K18250003 AK 200 S, Single pump
1 BM cover K21797A AK 200 S, Double pump
1 BM cover K21797B AK 200 ULTRA S
2 O-ring K11505001
3 Air-filter K11503001
4 Tube holder K18196001

6 O-ring 100318091
7 Holder K20397001
7 Holder K20397003
8 Housing pin 100320058

9 Washer 100392905
10 Screw 100372616
11 O-ring 100318055
12 Filter complete K18594003 AK 200 S
12 Filter complete K18594004 AK 200 ULTRA S

13 Tube clip 100314174 for Pressure lines, 2 pcs.
14 Tube holder K18527001
15 Tube clip 100314172
16 O-ring 100318064
17 Washer 100322003
18 BVS-unit K40100001 incl. 19
19 Optical Switch + BVS Harness M6973044
* Dripchamber holder, compl. K1 4034 005 does not incl. item 10 -11

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-32 Heparin pump
8
4
5 1
6
2

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Motor complete K11792001
2 Belt 100329093
3 Encoder unit complete K16179001
4 O-ring 100318112
6 Screw 100378406
7 Housing K15765002
8 Piston Holder K15782002
* Heparin pump complete K15761002 incl. 1, 2, 3, 7, 8

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-33 Magnetic clamp unit
1
3 2
7
8,12
9
10,11
4
6 5
15
14
13

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Screw 100370435
2 Clamp driver board K11332001
3 Double magnet K11866A
4 O-ring 100318010
5 Compression shoe K04403003
6 Screw 100370416
7 PT-screw 100367308
8 PT-screw 100366258
9 Light guide 1 K21328001
10 Light guide 2 K14835001
11 O-ring 100318111
12 Priming detector board K21057002
13 Shaft K18042001
14 Roller K04402003
15 O-ring 100318067
* Clamp unit complete K21325001

* Spare parts, front K18049002
* Priming detector kit K40146001 incl. item 8 - 12, 15

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-34 Level regulation, Air detector
2
5
6,7

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 O-ring 100318054
2 Pin, air detector door 100320065
3 Screw 100372619
4 Air detector door K15114002
5 Cover K11137002
6 Level regulator keyboard kit K40133001 incl. item 7

7 0-ring 100318117
* Air detector complete K40106001

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-35 Pressure transducer
8
5
6
4
7
Venous pressure
Arterial pressure
System
pressure
2
3

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 System pressure trans. tube set K21358A
2 Arterial pressure trans. tube set K15145001
3 Venous pressure trans. tube set K21353A
4 Luer-nut, grey K11830004 002=blue, 003=red
5 Luer-house, grey K16001004 002=blue, 003=red
6 Luer cone K18760001

7 O-ring 100318064
8 PT-screw 100369360
* Pressure transducer board K21365001

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-36 Monitor stand, MS
13,46
200
12
44,13
45
4
40 42 35
34
15
7 26 5 39 36
43 31
33(34) 13
27 30
49
32 31
32
32
30 31
38 3 37
14
8
20
2 19
27
16 31
29 24
30
6 31 32
11
1
28
41 51 18
50
47 26 48,25
17
9 21
16 16
23
22
10
16

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Lower frame K17822A For WRO 300: K23858A
2 Cover K17825004 For WRO 300: K23895001
3 Pillar complete K18029001 electrical adjustable, incl.item 41,51
Pillar complete K18029002 adjustable 5-position, incl. item 40,51
4 Upper frame K17823A
5 Service handle K17824A front

6 Holder for mast K17821001
7 Service handle K19454A rear
8 Stop K19196001 only for electrical adjustable pillar
9 Wheel 100304114 locking fluid 100 800 043
10 Wheel with brake 100304115 locking fluid 100 800 043

11 Screw 100388812 2 pcs.
12 Screw 100389903 4 pcs.
13 Screw 100388510 8 pcs.
14 Screw 100370612 1 pce. only for electrical adjustable pillar
15 Screw 100388620 4 pcs.

16 Screw 100388410 4 pcs.
17 Screw 100388045 1 pce.
18 Locking nut 100316260 1 pce.
19 Top tray K18253001
20 Silicon glue 100800084 for sealing between cover and pillar

21 Transformer holder K18615001
22 Transformer kit K21444001
23 Screw 100378512 4 pcs.
24 Batterybackup-kit K19845001 includes item 16,26-27,29-33
25 Lift control complete K20608001 incl.item 49-50

26 Battery cable K18531001 strap to bar
28 PC-connector 100202143 use when pos.24 is not installed
29 Strap 100314058 strap battery cable to bar
30 Washer 100392902 6 pcs.

31 Locking washer 100322011 5 pcs.
32 Nut 100390400 4 pcs.
33 Screw 100378416 1 pce.
34 Earth sign 100340001 3 pcs.
35 Mast top K16044B

36 Infusion stand 106206
37 Screw 100382816 1 pce.
38 Screw, inside pillar 100388020 2 pcs. for pillar K1 8029 002
39 Remote control 100900051 included in pos 3: K1 8029 001
40 Earth cable K09836004 from Fluid Monitor

41 Screw 100370410 2 pcs
42 Plug 100316266 5 pcs
43 Plug 100316274 2 pcs
44 Holder K20119001

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-36 Monitor stand, MS 200
13,46
12
44,13
45
4
40 42 35
34
15
7 26 5 39 36
43 31
33(34) 13
27 30
49
32 31
32
32
30 31
38 3 37
14
8
20
2 19
27
16 31
29 24
30
6 31 32
11
1
28
41 51 18
50
47 26 48,25
17
9 21
16 16
23
22
10
16

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

45 Holder for filter K20118001
46 Washer 100392905 4 pcs
47 Cable lift control K20638001
48 Fixing plate K20607001
49 Seal 100314291
50 Screw 100382030 4 pcs

51 Battery holder K40162001
* Battery kit K40151001 includes 2 batteries

* Tilt protection K23902A For WRO 300
* Filter attachment K23920001 For WRO 300
* Adaption kit K23955001 For WRO 300

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-37 AC/DC unit
230V
7
115V
2 230V
10
10
6
8,9 1
4
5

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
1 AC/DC unit K20676002 100-240V

2 Mains cable 100220266 230V
3 Mains cable 100220220 115V
4 Fuse holder 100212021
5 Fuse 100213113 T12A
6 Retaining clip 100203179

7 Mains cable 100220267 230V for Germany with CEE-plug
8 Filter holder K20391001
9 Filter AC/DC K18891001
10 Seal kit K21733001
* Mains cable 100220303 230V (China)

* Mains cable 100220304 230V (UK)
* Ferrit 100120100

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-38 AK 200 ULTRA S: FM Valves
EVVA FOVA DRVA
EMVA
ZEVA
TAVA
CWVA
FIVA
HDVA
BYVA
DIVA
BCVA
PBVA
PAVA
TPVA
LDVA
INVA FLVA RFVA

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
1 CWVA K15253B
3 CWVA complete K19132001 incl. 1,2,4,5,7,8
4 FIVA K15235A
6 FIVA complete K19132001 incl. 1,2,4,5,7,8
7 HDVA K15235A
9 HDVA complete K19132001 incl. 1,2,4,5,7,8
Note! All other FM-valves, see 7-1

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-39 Non-return valve, inlet nipples
7
1-4
5
6

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
1 Non-return valve K18191001

2 O-ring 100319028
3 O-ring 100319008
4 Membrane K17989001
5 Nipple K19219001
6 Nipple K16273001
7 Connector, T 100334044

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-40 Internal pressure reg., infusion port
4,5,6
15
7
1,2
10
11,12,13,14
9

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
1 Pressure regulator K14948001

2 Membrane K40153001
4 Membrane K08056C
5 Screw 100378325
6 Nut 100316082
7 Screw 100378304
8 Screw 100378408
9 Infusion nipple K16512001
10 Screw 100366314
11 Infusion port, complete K18180001

12 Marker K05009003
13 O-ring 100318063
14 Sealing K18184001
15 Gasket K15314001
* Valve unit, complete K19132001

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-41 Ultrafilter holder
12
13
14,15
17
21
4 18
3 10,11
5
6
1,2
7 260mm
9
19
8
400mm 7
20
17
16
6
9
13
12

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
1 Filter holder, complete K17724003 Water filter (ULTRA only)

2 Filter holder, complete K17724004 Dialysis fluid filter
3 Square ring K14920001
4 Slide K17721002
5 Slide connector K17722001
6 Clamp 100334203
7 Tube 100312093
8 Spring 100346058
9 Screw 100371025
10 Nipple K16273001 for Water filter
11 Nipple K16273005 for Dialysis fluid filter

12 PT-screw 100369360
13 Washer K15691001
14 House K17723002 for Water filter
15 House K17723003 for Dialysis fluid filter
16 House K17723001
17 O-ring 100319029
18 Nut K18032001
19 Rear cover K17720002
20 PT-screw 100366314
21 Screw 100366258

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-42 Water inlet-, drain-connections
AK 200 S
Dialys fluid filter
U-FILTER U-FILTER
Airgap / Drain
Water filter
9
11 10
14
13
12

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
Item
Item Denomination no.
Order no. Remarks
Clamp
1 Reinforced PVC tube K03343A 100334217

4 Walbro Pressure regulator 100313255
5 Non-return valve K17978001
6 Reinforced silicon tube 8x3.5mm 100312094 100334217

9 Nipple K16273002
10 Nut K18032001
11 Nipple K19219001
12 Nipple K11817001
13 Plastic nut 100316061
14 Tube 100312012

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-43 Printed Circuit Boards

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005

1 Receiver board (tube sensor) K09866004
2 UFM driver board K11194002
3 pH analog board K11294002
4 Clamp driver board K11332001
5 pH driver board K11415001
6 Rotor guard board K15670003

7 Transmission board (tube sensor) K18786001
8 BM distribution board K19433002
9 Power distribution board K40118002
10 Panel control board K40119002

11 Analog distribution board K40142001
12 Priming detector board K21057002
13 Blood pressure board K40127001
14 Pressure transducer board K21365001
15 FM CPU board K40078002

16 BM CPU board K40079003

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-44 Cablings

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
1 Mains cable 100220220 115V

2 Mains cable 100220266 230V
3 Mains cable 100220267 230V (German)
4 Mains cable 100220303 230V (China)
5 Mains cable 100220304 230V (UK)
6 LVDS/FPD cable 100220282

7 Distribution board cable K11289001
8 20-pol Amp.board cable K11290001
9 Conductivity cell cable K11291001
10 UFM transf. Cable K11374001
11 Shield connection cable K11375001

12 10-pol. Cable K11377001
13 Feeding pH cable K11378001
14 Priming cable K11412001
15 Blood pump motor encoder cable K14140002
16 Preamp shield cable K14704001

17 Battery cable K18531001
18 Air detector cable (2) K18728001
21 Blood pump motor cable K19128001

22 CW,HD,FIVA/TOP P. cable K19168001
23 BM I/O cable K19778001
24 BM/FM 20-pol. Cable K19779001
25 BM panel cable K19780001
26 BM Z24P cable K19781001

27 BM PDB cable K19785001
28 FM Z24P cable K19786001
29 Battery cable + holder K19787001
30 FM BiCart Select cable K20005001
31 BiCart holder switch cable K20220001

32 BiCart Select holder switch cable K20349001
33 Mains cable 115V K20416002
34 BM BVS cable K21187001
35 FM BPM 20-pol. cable K21195001
36 BM 24V panel cable K21204001

37 FM digital cable (1) K21269001
38 FM digital cable (2) K21270001
39 Air detector cable (1) K23721001
40 Air pump fuse cable K21895001
41 Air pump fuse cable K21919001

42 Diascan cable K22993001
43 BPM cable K23543001

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-45 Tubes and silicone connectors

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
1 Silicone tube 6x1.6 100312012

4 Reinforced silicone tube 5x3.0mm 100312093
5 Reinforced silicone tube 8x3.5mm 100312094
6 Silicone tube 12x2 mm 100312138

7 Santoprene tube 3x1.5mm 100312141
8 Reinforced PVC tube 13x3.5mm 100312142
9 Reinforced PVC tube 19.4x3.7mm 100312156
10 Silicone tube 2x1.5 mm 100312166
11 Reinforced PVC tube 8x3.0mm K03343A

12 Pick up tube (blue) K13467001
13 Pick up tube (red) K13467002
14 Dia connector set (red) K14081002
15 Dia connector set (blue) K14082002
16 Arterial pressure tube set K15145001

17 Pressure test tube set K21351A
18 Venous pressure tube set K21353A
19 System pressure tube set K21358A
20 Tube connector, straight K10986001 6.5 and 4.8mm
21 Tube connector, straight K10986002 6.5 and 5.0mm

24 Connector, angled K12951001 6.5mmx2
25 Connector, T K12961001 6.5mmx3
26 Connector, T K17237001 8.0x2 and 4.2mm

27 Connector, straight K17725001 6.5 and 8.9mm

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-46 PEX tubes

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
Note! The numbers on following PEX tubes only corresponds to AK 200 S and AK 200 ULTRA S.
1 Tube no 13 K14984001
2 Tube no 16 K12870001
3 Tube no 19 K14918001
4 Tube no 31 K13231002 length 38mm, straight
5 Tube no 32 K13231003 length 59mm, straight
6 Tube no 32 K15588001
7 Tube no 47 K15372001
8 Tube no 48 K14985001
9 Tube no 49 K14987001
10 Tube no 50 K19010001
11 Tube no 51 K18212001
12 Tube no 54 K18215001
13 Tube no 55 K18216001
14 Tube no 76 K18368001
15 Tube no 111 K15326001
16 Tube no 112 K16263001

17 Tube no 120 K18231001
18 Tube no 121 K18232001
19 Tube no 122 K18233001
20 Tube no 123 K18234001
21 Tube no 124 K18235001

22 Tube no 126 K18238001
23 Tube no 130 K18361001
24 Tube no 131 K18383001
25 Tube no 132 K18393001
26 Tube no 133 K18394001

27 Tube no 134 K18395001
28 Tube no 135 K19165001
29 Tube no 152 K20130001
30 Tube no 154 K20131001
31 Tube no 155 K20128001

32 Tube no 156 K20129001
33 Tube no 501 K18799001
34 Tube no 522 K20922001
35 Tube no 20262 K20262001
36 Tube no 21218 K21218001

37 Tube no 21219 K21219001
38 Tube no 21220 K21220001
39 Tube no 21221 K21221001
40 Tube no 21223 K21223001
41 Tube no 21224 K21224001

42 Tube no 21225 K21225001
43 Tube no 21226 K21226001
44 Tube no 21228 K21228001
45 Tube no 21229 K21229001

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
7-46 PEX tubes

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
46 Tube no 21230 K21230001

47 Tube no 21233 K21233001
48 Tube no 21234 K21234001
49 Tube no 21235 K21235001
50 Tube no 21236 K21236001
51 Tube no 21237 K21237001

52 Tube no 21238 K21238001
53 Tube no 21239 K21239001
54 Tube no 21773 K21773001
55 Tube no 21774 K21774001
56 Tube no 21775 K21775001

57 Tube no 21782 K21782001
58 Tube no 21784 K21784001
59 Tube no 21814 K21814001
60 Tube no 22543 K22543001
61 Tube no 23210 K23210001

62 Tube no 23211 K23211001
63 Tube no 23464 K23464001
64 Tube no 23473 K23473001
65 Tube no 23487 K23487001
66 Tube no 23488 K23488001

67 Tube no 23489 K23489001
68 Tube no 23494 K23494001
69 Tube no 23528 K23528001
70 Tube no 23791 K23791001
71 Tube B K19042001
72 Tube K13231004 Length 28mm, not marked, straight,
occurs in many different places.
73 Tube K1 6294 001 Not marked, slightly bend, occurs
above pump unit 2 in AK 200 ULTRA S.
74 Tube 100 312 056 Sold per meter

HCEN9288 Rev.06.2005
HCEN9288 © Gambro Lundia AB,2001. Revision June 2005

Box 10101
SE-220 10 Lund
Sweden
Tel: +46 46 16 90 00
Fax: +46 46 16 96 96
www.gambro.com
Chapter 9
Symbol Description
HCEN9289 Revision 02. 2006

Service Manual - Symbols 9:1
Symbol description
Note: All symbols in this list may not be represented on this product.
Description
Alternating current
Protective earth (ground)
Warning, consult accompanying documents
Off (power, disconnection from the mains)
On (power, connection to the mains)
Type B, applied part
Handle with care
This way up
Keep dry

9:2 Service Manual - Symbols
Description
Input /Output
Year of manufacturing
Heater power supply outlet
Conforms to requirements in EC Council Directive 93/42/EEC

concerning medical devices. 0086 identifies BSI, British Standards
Institution, as Notified Body.
CSA approved for Canada
CSA approved for Canada and USA
CSA-listed label manufacturer
Prohibited behaviour
Equipotentiality
Separate collection for electrical and electronic equipment

Service Manual - Symbols 9:3
This page is left intentionally blank

9:4 Service Manual - Symbols
Calibration Manual
Calibration Manual
General
Calibration
Befpre calibration ............................................... 2
Calibration, Fluid Monitor

Technical Facilities ............................................ 3
A/D Converter FM (CPU Q) ............................... 4
A/D Converter FM (CPU F;1) ............................ 4
A/D Converter FM (CPU F;2) ............................ 5
Degassing Transducer calibration ..................... 6
Flow Output Pressure Transducer calibr. ......... 7
Flow Input Pressure Transducer calibr. ........... 8
High Pressure Guard Transducer calibr. .......... 9
Dialysis Fluid Pressure Transducer calibr. ..... 10
Safety Guard Transducer calibration .............. 11
pH-sensor calibration ....................................... 12
Offset calibration .............................................. 12
Complete calibration ........................................ 12
Blood Leak Detector calibration ...................... 13
Internal pressure regulator calibration ........... 14
Temperature FM CPU Board calibration ........ 14
Conductivity Transducer calibration ............... 15
BiCart Select - Level detector calibration ....... 16
BiCart Select - control and protective
pump calibration ............................................... 18
Calibration of Flow Restrictor Node
(FRN) mainflow supervision ............................ 19
Automatic UF calibration ........................... 21

Adjusting the low level signals and
the high level signals ....................................... 22
Calibration, Blood Monitor

A/D Converter BM (CPU P) ............................. 23
Venous Pressure Transducer calibration ........ 23
Arterial Pressure Transducer calibration ....... 24
System Pressure Transducer calibration ........ 25
Level Detector calibration (Air detector) ......... 26
Priming Detector calibration ........................... 27
Blod volume sensor, BVS ................................. 27
Temperature BM CPU Board calibration ........ 28
Occlusion adjustment, blood pump/infusion
pump ................................................................. 28
BPM test ........................................................... 29
Logging after calibration ............................ 31
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S HCEN12089 Rev. 07. 2004 10:1

Calibration Manual
Calibration
General
Before Calibration:
Guidelines for the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S,
related to Service and Maintenance: Perform both a disinfection and a cleaning/
decalcification to remove both organic and
• During transportation and storage: calcium precipitates, according to the AK 200 S /
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S must for practical AK 200 ULTRA S Operator’s Manual. This is not
reasons be rinsed and drained, however, as soon necessary if this has been done during mainte-
as the machine is installed, the disinfection nance.
schedule should be followed.
• During repair of any of the parts in the flow

path, special care should be taken and a good
hygiene should be kept.
• Used and repaired spare parts may be used in

the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S if they are
cleaned and repaired in a good way.
• A general guide line is that the ultra filters

should be mounted on the AK 200 S / AK 200
ULTRA S as well as the disinfection schedule
should be followed, as soon as the machine is
connected to the water supply.
Warning! After completing the check and calibrations, the conductivity value must always be
confirmed by the hospital laboratory or equivalent.
10:2 AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S HCEN12089 Rev. 07. 2004

Calibration Manual
Calibration, Fluid Monitor

Technical Facilities
The following instructions are based on the

availability of some technical facilities, listed below.
Test equipment: Tolerance: Manufacturer: Gambro Order

number:
Conductivity measurement ± 0.1 mS/cm MESA, IBP
Pressure measurement ± 2mmHg to ± 200mmHg MESA, IBP, Druck
± 1% beyond ± 200mmHg
If BPM is installed:
± 0.8mmHg
Temperature measurement: ± 0.2ºC MESA, IBP
Digital Voltmeter ± 0.5% Fluke
Measuring glass ± 0.5ml
Blood leak Calibration N/A Gambro K2 2222 001
Cover
Adjustment Kit For Blood ± 0.1mm Gambro K1 5352 001
Pump Rollers
Calibration tube kit N/A Gambro K1 3983 002
Drip chamber N/A
Tube for calibration of N/A
priming detector
Safety tester According to IEC 60601.1 Rigel, Biotec
*BPM test equipment N/A Gambro K2 2151 001
*BPM Cuff number 3 N/A Gambro 100 900 089
*pH buffers ± 0.07 pH units pH 7 – 100 810 001
pH 9 – 100 810 002
Measuring cylinder N/A Gambro K2 2349 001
UF-calibration station N/A Gambro K2 1908

Calibration Manual
A/D Converter FM (CPU Q), FM 21 A/D Converter FM (CPU F;1), FM 22
Equipment needed: Digital voltmeter. Equipment needed: Digital voltmeter.
1. Start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S and 1. Start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S and
enter the servicemenu. enter the servicemenu.
2. Set the display to: 2. Set the display to:
A/D CONVERTER CPU P;Q A/D CONVERTER CPU F;1

FM 21 FM 22
START START
3. Press UF
STOP
to enter calibration routine. 3. Press UF
STOP
to enter calibration routine.
4. Measure the voltage between 4. Measure the voltage between

TP 3 and TP 1 on the FM CPU board. (See TP 10 (earth) and TP 8 (ref) on the
figure below.) FM CPU board. (See figure below.)
5. Set the “REF SET” on the display to the TP10

value shown on the voltmeter (min. 48,96 TP8 TP11
TP5 TP12
mV max. 50,88 mV). TP2
E01339007
START
6. Press UF
STOP
to load the value into the
TP13
EEPROM. TP3
TP14
TP18
TP1 TP19
TP15 TP20
TP6
TP4
TP10
TP8 TP11
TP5 TP12
TP2 TP9 TP16
TP7 TP17
TP22
E01339007
1073
TP21
TP13 TP18
TP3
TP14 TP19
TP1 TP15 TP20
5. Set the “REF SET” on the display to the
TP6
TP4 value shown on the voltmeter (min. 48,96
mV max. 50,88 mV).
TP9 TP16 START

TP7 TP17 6. Press UF
STOP
TP22
EEPROM.
1073
TP21

Calibration Manual
A/D Converter FM (CPU F;2), FM 23
Equipment needed: Digital voltmeter.
1. Start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S and

enter the servicemenu.
2. Set the display to:
A/D CONVERTER CPU F;2

FM 23
START
3. Press UF
STOP
to enter calibration routine.
4. Measure the voltage between TP 5 and TP 2

on the FM CPU board. (See figure below)
TP10
TP8 TP11
TP5 TP12
TP2
E01339007
TP13 TP18
TP3
TP14 TP19
TP1 TP15 TP20
TP6
TP4
TP9 TP16
TP7 TP17
TP22
1073
TP21
5. Set the “REF SET” on the display to the

value shown on the voltmeter (min. 48,96
mV, max. 50,88 mV).
START
6. Press UF
STOP
EEPROM.

Calibration Manual
Degassing Transducer calibration, FM 7

(Tolerance ± 5mm Hg or ± 3%)
Equipment needed: Pressure meter, Calibration

tube set. 15. Set the “REF. SET” value on the AK 200 S /
AK 200 ULTRA S display to the same value
1. Start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S and as shown on the Pressure meter.
let it run with fluid for 30 minutes.
16.* Press below “REF. SET” to enter the
2. Initiate drain. When DRAIN starts to flash,
value and wait for the calibration display.
enter the service menu, Calibration and
select Extern. Set the display at the pressu-
START
re transducer to be calibrated. 17. Press UF
STOP
to load the calibration values into
the EEPROM.
3. Disconnect tube no. 220 at the flow/de-
gassing pump unit and replace it with a 18. Reconnect tubes no. 220 and 224.
closed end tube. Disconnect the pump motor
electrically. 19. Reconnect the pump motor.
4. Disconnect tube no. 224 at the degassing 20. To exit from the Degassing Pressure
pump unit.
Calibration, press .
START
5. Press UF
STOP
to enter the calibration routine.
* If an “ERROR MESSAGE” is shown on the
6. Set the “REF. SET” value on the display to
0 mmHg (with the set knob). display at this point, push and start
again from point no 3. If the error still
exists after a 2nd try, check that the calibra-
tion tubes are intact.
value and wait for the calibration display. If the tubes are correct, repeat the calibra-
tion procedure with a new transducer.
8. Connect a Pressure meter (together with a
calibration tube) in the place of tube no. 224 Ex. of calibration error meassage:
at the degassing pump unit.
9. Zeroset the reference instrument.

Cal. error Sens Offset Corr
10. Apply a pressure of approx. -500 mmHg.
8 8990 -276 0.999
11. Set the “REF. SET” value on the AK 200 S /
as shown on the Pressure meter.

13. The machine will now ask you to confirm to

enter sensitivity calibration.
To confirm: press below “YES”.
To exit: press (will stop calibration).
14. Apply a pressure of approx. +500 mmHg.

Calibration Manual
Flow Output Pressure Transducer calibration, FM 8


tube set. 12. Press below “REF. SET” to enter the
enter the service menu, Calibration and To confirm: press below “YES”.
re transducer to be calibrated.
3. Disconnect tube no. 226 at the flow out unit.
4. Disconnect tube no. 121 at the flow out unit
and replace it with a closed end tube. 15. Set the “REF. SET” value on the AK 200 S /
5. Press
START
UF to enter the calibration routine. as shown on the Pressure meter.
STOP
6. Set the “REF. SET” value on the display to 16. Press below “REF. SET” to enter the
0 mmHg (with the set knob). value and wait for the calibration display.
7.* Press below “REF. SET” to enter the 17. Press

START
UF
STOP
value and wait for the calibration display. the EEPROM.
8. Connect a Pressure meter (together with a 18. Reconnect tubes no. 226 and 121.
calibration tube) in place of tube no. 121 at
the flow output pump unit.

that is shown on the Pressure meter.

Calibration Manual
Flow Input Pressure Transducer calibration, FM 9

Equipment needed: Pressure meter, Calibration 12. Press below “REF. SET” to enter the
tube set. value and wait for the calibration display.
1. Start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S and 13. The machine will now ask you to confirm to
let it run with fluid for 30 minutes. enter sensitivity calibration.

enter the service menu, Calibration and To confirm: press below “YES”.
select Extern. Set the display at the pressure
transducer to be calibrated.
3. Disconnect tube no. 32 at the EVVA valve
and block tube no. 32 by using a closed tube. 14. Press
START
UF to load the calibration values into
STOP
the EEPROM.
4. Disconnect both end of tube no. K23473 at
the pressure transducer unit.
15. Reconnect tubes no. 32 and K23473.
START
5. Press UF
STOP
to enter the calibration routine. Note!
For machines without Differential Pressure
6. Set the “REF. SET” value on the display to 0 Transducer, refer to the Flow Input Pressure
mmHg (with the set knob). Transducer calibration in the AK 200 S /
AK 200 ULTRA S Maintenance- Manual,
HCEN9293, Revision 02.2003.
7. Press below “REF. SET” to enter

calibration tube) in the place of tube no.
K23473 at the side of the pressure
transducer unit that is connected to the flow
input pump unit.

that is shown on the Pressure meter.

Calibration Manual
High Pressure Guard Transducer calibration, FM 10

Equipment needed: Pressure meter, Calibration 11. Press below “REF. SET” to enter the
tube set. value and wait for the calibration display.
1. Start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S and 12. The machine will now ask you to confirm to
let it run with fluid for 30 min. enter sensitivity calibration.
enter the service menu, Calibration and
select Extern. Set the display at the pressure To exit: press (will stop calibration).
transducer to be calibrated.
3. Disconnect tube no. 19 at the bypass unit. 13. Apply a pressure of approx. +500 mmHg.

START
4. Press UF
STOP
to enter the calibration routine. AK 200 ULTRA S display to the same value
shown on the Pressure meter.
0 mmHg (with the set knob). 15. Press below “REF. SET” to enter the
6. Press below “REF. SET” to enter the
value and wait for the calibration display. 16. Press
START
UF to load the calibration values into
STOP
the EEPROM.
17. Reconnect tube no. 19.
the bypass unit.


Calibration Manual
Dialysis Fluid Pressure Transducer calibration, FM 11

Equipment needed: Pressure meter, Calibration value and wait for the calibration display.
tube set.
1. Start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S and enter sensitivity calibration.
enter the service menu,Calibration and
3. Disconnect tube no. 130 from the deairating
chamber. 14. Set the “REF. SET” value on the AK 200 S /
START
4. Press UF
STOP
0 mmHg (with the set knob). value and wait for the calibration display.
START
6. Press below “REF. SET” to enter the 16. Press UF

STOP
value and wait for the calibration display. the EEPROM.
7. Connect a Pressure meter (together with a 17. Reconnect tube no. 130.
the deairating chamber.


Calibration Manual
Safety Guard Transducer calibration, FM 12

Equipment needed: Pressure meter, Calibration 8. Zeroset the reference instrument.

tube set.
let it run in direct flow (not by-pass) with
fluid for 30 minutes.
enter the service menu, calibration and 11. Press below “REF. SET” to enter the
select Extern. Set the display at the pressu- value and wait for the calibration display.
3. Disconnect the two fluid tubes from the enter sensitivity calibration.
safety bypass unit.
START
4. Press UF
STOP
0 mmHg (with the set knob). 13. Apply a pressure of approx. +500 mmHg.

value and wait for the calibration display. as shown on the Pressure meter.

calibration tube) in place of the bypass tubes 15. Press below “REF. SET” to enter the
at the safety bypass unit. (See fig. below) value and wait for the calibration display.
START
16. Press UF
STOP
the EEPROM.
Co
nd
uct
m S ivity
/cm
ph
@
37 O
C
ph Co
@ mS ndu
25 /cm ctiv
O
C ity
Te
mp
Scr era
oll ture
Ca Pre
lib ss
rate ure
Tim
er
En
ter
/R
DX ese
t

Calibration Manual
pH-sensor calibration, FM 13
Equipment needed: Cup with pH 7 buffer solu- 8.* Press below “REF SET” and wait until
tion, bowl with pH 7 buffer solution and bowl the calibration display returns.
with pH 9 buffer solution.
START
Calibration should be performed on a regular 9. Press UF

STOP
to load the calibration value into
basis to ensure optimum performance: the EEPROM.
A complete calibration procedure consists 10. Remount the pH sensor into the pH sensor
of the following steps: housing.
1. Offset calibration, with a buffer solution Complete calibration

(a solution with a very accurate and stable 1. Make sure there is no flow or fluid in the
pH-value) having a pH-value in the range of FM.
pH 6.5-7.5, followed by:
2. Enter the service menu and set the
2. Slope calibration with a buffer solution AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S display on
having pH-value that differs at least 2 pH-units “pH”.
from the buffer used for offset calibration.
START
3. Press UF
STOP
Calibration schedule:
An Offset calibration should be performed
after one month in operation and then every 4. Remove the pH sensor from the pH sensor
third month to verify the performance. housing by loosening the nut holding the pH
sensor and rinse the sensor in distilled
A Complete calibration procedure should water.
be performed at installation and then every
12 months. 5. Set “REF SET” on the AK 200 S /
AK 200 ULTRA S display to pH 7.
Offset calibration
6. Put the pH sensor in a bowl with pH 7 buffer
1. Make sure there is no flow or fluid in the
solution, or whatever reference solution
FM .
available, which must cover the glass
membrane i.e. the solution should reach at
least 30 mm above the bottom of the bowl.
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S display on
“pH”.
7. Stir in order to achieve balance in the buffer
solution. Do not let the pH sensor lean
START
3. Press UF
STOP
to enter the calibration routine. against the bottom of the cup.
Wait for 2 minutes.
4. Remove the pH sensor from the pH sensor
housing by loosening the nut holding the pH 8.* Press below “REF SET” and wait until
sensor and rinse the sensor in distilled water.
the calibration display returns.
5. Set “REF SET” on the AK 200 S /
9. Rinse the pH sensor in distilled water.
10. Set “REF SET” on the AK 200 S /
6. Put the pH sensor in a cup with pH 7 buffer
solution which must cover the glass membrane
i.e. the level in the cup should be at least 30 mm
11. Put the pH sensor in a bowl with pH 9 buffer
from the bottom.
solution which must cover the glass
membrane i.e. the solution should reach at
least 30 mm above the bottom of the bowl.
solution. Do not let the pH sensor lean against
the bottom of the cup.
Wait for 2 minutes.

Calibration Manual
Blood Leak Detector calibration, FM 24

solution. The pH sensor must not lean Equipment needed: Blood leak calibration cover.
against the bottom of the cup.
Wait for 2 minutes.
1. Make sure there is no fluid in the Fluid
Monitor.
13.* Press below “REF.SET” and wait.
The display shows: Entering sensitivity 2. Remove the blood leak detector cover and
calibration clean the inside of the blood leak housing.
3. Mount a blood leak calibration cover. Make

14. Press below “CONFIRM” to confirm
sure that the filter is in horisontal position
that the calibration continues. , start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S.
15. When the calibration display returns, Note! Let the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S
START stabilize at 37° C
press UF
STOP
to load the calibration values
into the EEPROM. 4. Enter the Service menu, select calibration,
intern and Blood Leak Detector.
16. Remount the pH-sensor into the pH sensor Place A-pickup tube in concentrate contai-
housing. ner and let it stabilise for 15 minutes.
* If an error message is shown after this step, START

5. Press UF
STOP
to enter the blood leak calibration
check the buffer solutions, the level in the
bowl and repeat the procedure from step 1. If routine.
there still is an error after a 2nd try, replace
the pH-sensor. 6. Set “REF SET” on the AK 200 S /
AK 200 ULTRA S to zero.
NOTE! The pH-sensor should be changed every
eighteenth month. 7.* Press below “REF SET”.
8. Turn the calibration filter to vertical position

.
9. Set “REF SET” on the Blood Monitor display

to 100.
10. Press below “REF SET”.
11.* Confirm to enter sensivity calibration by

pressing below “YES”.
START
12. Press UF
STOP
to store the calibration values.
13. Drain the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S and

remount the standard blood leak cover.
* If an error message occurs during calibration:

Check the position of the calibration filter and
repeat from point 1.
If an error occurs after a 2nd try, change the
blood leak detector.

Calibration Manual
Internal pressure regulator calibration Temperature FM CPU Board calibration,

FM 0
Equipment needed: Pressure meter, Calibration Equipment needed: Temperatur meter.
tube set.
1. Remove the back plate of the FM.
1. Let the machine go through Fch.
2.* Make sure AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S has
been switched off for at least 30 min.
2 Press and set the main flow to 500 ml/ without beeing moved (to assure room
temperature on the FM CPU board).
min.
3. Start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S,
enter the service menu and set the
3 Choose or . AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S display to:
TEMPERATURE FM CPUBOARD
4 Press and switch to .
FM0
START
5 Connect the dialyzer coupling to the conduc- 4. Press UF
STOP
tivity cell on the Pressure meter.
5. Read the room temperature on a
6 Adjust venous pressure to +100 mmHg and Temperatur meter and set the “REF SET”
TMP to +400 mmHg. value on the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S
display to the same value.
7 Connect a tube between the infusion port and
an external Pressure meter.
6. Press the lit below “REF SET” and
wait for the calibration display to return.
8 Press to obtain main flow through the
START
pressure regulator. 7. Press UF
STOP
the EEPROM.
9 Adjust the pressure regulator to +55 mmHg
±5 mmHg. * Make sure the ref. instrument transducer has
been in room temperature at least 30 min.
10 Press and remove the Pressure meter NOTE!

Calibrations of temperature transducers in
and tube.
heating vessel or conductivity cell need spe-
cial equipment and can only be performed at
Gambro Lundia AB Lund.
Internal Pressure Regulator

Calibration Manual
Conductivity Transducer calibration,

FM 20
Equipment needed: Conductivity meter. container and let the AK 200 S /

AK 200 ULTRA S stabilize at 14 mS for
The calibration is a “two point calibration”. The 20 minutes.
two points are 0,00 mS (RO-water) and
14,0 mS (with concentrate). 7. Set the “REF. SET” value on the
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S display to the
NOTE! same value shown on the reference instru-
• Before conductivity calibration, Chemical ment.
cleaning must be performed, one with Citric
acid and one with Hypochlorite.
• Check the temperature transducers since the
temperature affects the conductivity calcula- value and wait for the calibration display.
tions.
• To keep the temperature inside the 9. The machine will now ask you to confirm to
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S, do not remove enter sensitivity calibration.
the blood monitor and make sure the plastic To confirm: press below “YES”.
shield covers the interior of the fluid monitor.
1. Start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S. Set To exit: press (will stop calibration).
the temperature to 37,5 °C.
START
Note! The mainflow must be set to 500 ml/min. 10. Press UF

STOP
the EEPROM.
2. Enter the service menu, calibration mode
FM and select “Intern”. Note! It is possible to select between several
different conductivity calibrations, to fit all
Select which conductivity transducer to be needs. All these calibrations are done in the
calibrated. FM 20 is complete calibration for same way as described above.
all conductivity transducers. Refer to Service Technician's Guide /
Fluid monitor flow diagram, calibration.
START
3. Press UF
STOP
Place both the A- and B-pickup tubes into
the heating vessel. Connect the Gambro
reference instrument according to the figure
below.
4. Press BYPASS if lit.

Let the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S and
Conductivity meter stabilise for at least 30
minutes. Set the REF SET value on the
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S display to the
same value as shown on the Conductivity
meter. (Conductivity of the inlet water 0.00
or close to 0.00)
The info. display will now show 00,00, if not,

set REF SET to 00,00 with Set knob.
5. Press below “REF. SET” to enter value

and wait for next display.
6. Put the pickup tube A into concentrate

Calibration Manual
BiCart Select - Level detector Calibration instruction

calibration
Enter the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S calibra-
tion menu, choose
Equipment needed: SelectBag (full).
1. FM
The level detector is used in the protective
system for supervision of the SelectBag flow.
Extern Intern Other
It consists of an IR-LED and an IR-transistor
placed on a fluid chamber. The goal is to form a
2. Select Other
logical output if the chamber is filled with liquid
or not. The sensitivity is dependent on the
modulation frequency that controls the IR-LED.
Lvl det Sel Pump UF
This must be calibrated by adjusting the fluid
level and finding the correct frequency.
3. Select Lvl det
The calibration is performed automatically in the
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S calibration system
INSERT SelectBag AND OPEN
and requires only a filled SelectBag.
SelectCart HOLDER Start
At start-up after manufacturing or after protec-
tive pump node exchange, no calibration value
will be available. The machine will use default
value for test purpose, but the following error-
4. Remove the protective foil from the connector
code will be generated and no treatment will be
port of the SelectBag.
possible:
Open and hold the latch of the holder at its
uppermost position while hanging the
FCN 1.01.009 BiCart Select protective
SelectBag into the holder with the connector
system level detector not
port upwards.
calibrated.
Press down the latch to a horizontal position,
whereby the membrane of the SelectBag is
penetrated by the spike.
Note!
Tap lightly on the SelectBag so that any air
bubbles gather at the top.
• The machine should be run with fluid for
approximately 30 minutes followed by a
WARNING!
Rinse/Drain before the calibration is per-
* Avoid touching the plastic spike.
formed.
* Be careful to avoid fluid from the
• When the level detector is calibrated with
SelectBag splashing into your eyes.
default value (i.e. the first time), this value
might cause the pump not to stop at full
chamber since high level is not detected. This
will mean that fluid is pumped out through
the disinfection port in the SelectCart holder
(lower port) during the priming phase.
5. Open both SelectCart latches.
6. Press “Start”

Calibration Manual
CALIBRATION IN PROGRESS
Old value xxx Trouble shooting
If the calibration was unsuccessful , the following
The calibration will now be performed automati-
attention is displayed:
cally by the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S. Two
calibrations are performed and their results are
CALIBRATION FAILED
compared.
If the difference are within a limit, the calibra-
tion is approved.
Possible reasons for problems are:
The new values are not checked against the old.
• No SelectBag inserted
When the calibration is ready, the following text
• Fluid tubes faulty connected/leaking
is displayed:
• Pump volumes not calibrated
• Defective level detector/misconnected
CALIBRATION READY
• Air/foam in SelectBag fluid tubes and/or level
Old value xxx New value xxx
detector chamber
• Calibration values differ to much
START
7. Press UF
STOP
for storage of new value. • Pumps defective or faulty connected
• Defective FM CPU-board
PRS EEPROM PARAMETER STORAGE If no obvious errors are found, perform a new
Wait for selection menu calibration.
If the calibration value storage was unsuccessful,

the following attention is displayed:
PRS EEPROM NOT RESPONDING

Possible reasons for problems are:

• Defective FM CPU-board
• Faulty cable connections
Check and replace if problems remains.

Calibration Manual
BiCart Select - control and protective

pump calibration Priming
To evacuate all air bubbles it is important to run
Equipment needed: SelectBag, Measuring cylin-
following priming procedure before starting the
der.
calibration:
This calibration is intended to be done after
following work operations: 4. Press below Priming. Let the machine
flush fluid from the SelectBag, via the BiCart
• Exchange of the control pump Select pumps to the empty fluid container. Tap
• Exchange of the protective pump lightly on the SelectBag to remove any air
• Exchange of the FM CPU board bubbles. Continue until there are no air
• Exchange of the select node PROM bubbles left after the control pump.
Before starting the calibration, the following 5. When the priming is completed (no air bubbles
preparations must be done:
left), press below Stop.
1. Disconnect the output tube from the BiCart
Select control pump at the Y-connector, and Calibration
re-connect it to a silicone tube, 100 312 032
via connector L05172001. Put this tube into 6. Move the silicone tube from the fluid contai-
an empty fluid container. ner into the Measuring cylinder.
2. Attach a SelectBag to the SelectBag holder. 7. Press below Start to enter the
3. Open the lower latch of the SelectCart holder. calibration procedure.
8. The Measuring cylinder is filled up. When the

Calibration instruction pumps stop, enter the reference volume from
Enter the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S calibra- the Measuring cylinder in ml. Turning the
tion menu, choose SET knob sets the reference volume.
1. FM Note! The blue line on the Measuring cylinder

indicates 250 ml. The Measuring cylinder is
SELECT FM SUPPORT OPTION graduated in 0.2 ml increments i.e. each small
Extern Intern Other mark indicates 0.2 ml.
2. Select Other
9. To enter the reference volume press and
SELECT FM SUPPORT OPTION the calibration calculation starts.
Lvl det Sel Pump UF
10. When the result of the calculation is dis-
3. Select Sel Pump played, press
START
UF to load the calibration
STOP
Following text is displayed: values into the EEPROM.
BiCart Select PUMP CALIBRATION Verification

Priming Stop Start Empty the Measuring cylinder. Insert a new
SelectBag to the SelectBag holder.
Repeat step 4 to 7 according to the instruction
above. Verify that the reference volume from the
Measuring cylinder is within 250 ± 2 ml.

Calibration Manual
Calibration of Flow Restrictor Node Calibration instruction

(FRN) main flow supervision Enter the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S calibra-
tion menu, choose
Equipment needed: N/A.
1. FM
The BiCart Select protective system use a flow
restrictor measurement for supervision of the SELECT FM SUPPORT OPTION
mainflow and the UF volume. The mainflow is Extern Intern Other
used in the supervision of the ratio between
SelectBag- and mainflow. 2. Select Other
The Flow-Out restrictor and the Flow-In SELECT FM SUPPORT OPTION

restrictor are used to form restrictor-flow meas- Lvl det Sel Pump UF
uring devices. By using the Flow Out Pressure
(FOP) the mainflow is calculated. By using the 3. Select UF
Flow-Input Pressure (FIP) in combination with
FOP the UF is calculated. 4. Auto
Note! 5. Complete
• Before the calibration procedure is started,
perform a heat disinfection. Note! If a separate FRN calibration is desired,
• A UF-cell calibration will automatically be steps 3 and 4 can be replaced by “Restr”
followed by FRN calibration if the machine is
preset for BiCart Select 6. Place Acetate pick-up tube in concentrate and
• If FOP transducer, FIP transducer, FOP connect UF calibration box.
pump or FIP pump is re-calibrated after-
wards, a new FRN calibration must be per- After the UF-cell calibration the FRN part will
formed. be performed:
• If the UF-cell is exchanged a new FRN cali-
bration must be performed. RESTRICTOR UF CALIBRATION
• If following parts are exchanged/calibrated, a CALIB NR 0
new FRN calibration must be performed and
the following conditions must be fulfilled: The calibration will now be performed automati-
- Stable temperature cally. CALIB NR 0-6 will be displayed during
- Deair chamber level must be over 13mm calibration.
- Degassing level must be 50mm
- Stable conductivity When the calibration is ready, the following
Exchanged Calibrated Installed attention is displayed:
FOP transducer X X
FIP transducer X X RESTRICTOR UF CALIBRATION
FOP pump X READY
FIP pump X
pH-cell X X X
Cond.cell B X Trouble shooting
FOP restrictor X
A FRN calibration takes approximately 15 min-
FIP restrictor X
utes. If the calibration is not ready within the
UF cell X X double time, cancel and perform a new calibra-
tion.
At start-up after manufacturing or after FRN Possible reasons for problems are:
node exchange, no calibration value will be • No UF-calibration performed
available. The following error-code will be gener- • No concentrate
ated during FCH and no treatment will be • Problems in fluid part
possible:
Check and replace if problems remains.
FCN 1.39.004 Too many tarations not
approved by node.

Calibration Manual
Laboratory test
Preset concentrates must be verified by
laboratory test of the dialysate produced by the
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S.
Leakage current test

No external equipment shall be connected to the
machine.
All measurements must be done according to

standard IEC 60601-1.
• Earth leakage current test:

Max 80 µA (115V)
Max 170 µA (230V)
• Patient leakage current test:

Max 5 µA (115V)
Max 10 µA (230V)
Note! Measure the leakage current between the

dialyzer connectors and earth.

Calibration Manual
Automatic UF calibration/Supervision flow meter calibration

General
After the reference volume is confirmed the UF
Equipment needed: UF calibration station. calibration runs automatically until the calibra-
tion is finished. Nothing happens if the operator
When automatic calibration is chosen, the Time by mistake should press the high limit key
lamp is lit. Complete automatic UF-calibration during automatic calibration.
calibrates the UF-cell and the supervision flow
meter. The UF-calibration unit is used as refer- Note! Do not change to manual calibration
ence in the calibration. (Refer to the UF calibra- while the box is filling or emptying!
tion unit - User Guide, HCEN9786.)
When the automatic UF calibration/Super-
Note that the verification of the supervision flow vision flow meter calibration is finished, a
meter calibration has to be done manually, see verification has to be done, see below.
instruction below.
Verification of the supervision
Perform both a disinfection and a cleaning flow meter calibration
decalcification to remove both organic and
(Must be performed after automatic UF calibration/
calcium precipitates, according to the
Supervision flow meter calibration is performed)
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S Operator’s Manual.
1. Restart the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S and
Running the calibration let it go through with a function control, Fch.
Note! Bypass the internal pressure regulator
when running the UF-calibration! 2. Press the Fluid Flow button and set the main
flow rate to 400 ml/min.
Note! All electrical connections must be done
before the power is turned on to the UF calibra- 3. Enter Service maintenance menu, select
tion box and the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S. Logging, select Intern, select Setup-A and select
Be aware of that there is no main switch on the array index SRI 110.
UF calibration box.
4. Measure the drain flow during two minutes,
Use the UF calibration cable, to connect the use a graduated vessel with a volume of approxi-
“new” UF calibration box, with the AK 200 S / mately 1,5 l. Tap the drain flow during exactly
AK 200 ULTRA S. two minutes, the measured and the displayed
volume should be 800 ml ±16 ml.
Connect the cable to the external connection
port P 76 (blue coloured) at the rear of the Note! For accurate test, keep the hose at the
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S. same height during the entire test.
Put the B suction tube to A concentrate 5. Set the Main flow to 600 ml/min and measure
container (or acetate container), A suction tube the drain flow as described above. The measured
in the heating vessel. and displayed volume should be 1200 ml ±24 ml.
Turn on the equipment on the following Note! Rinse the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S
order: before leaving it, or before turning it off.
1. Connect the UF calibration box to the mains.
2. Start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S with Turn off the equipment in the following
the main switch and the ON/OFF button. order:
1. AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S ON/OFF button.
Enter service mode. 2. AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S main switch.
3. Disconnect the UF calibration box (mains cable).
Connect the fluid tubes to the UF calibration box.
Select Service mode and then Calibration

mode, FM, Other, UF, Auto, Complete, set
reference volume.

Calibration Manual
Adjusting the low level signals The high level detector:

and the high level signals • Connect a voltmeter between IC1, pin 5 and
Z0VL.
Following text is only valid for the “old” • Check that there is no fluid at the high level
UF calibration box. detector.
• Write down the voltage V HIGH AIR.
It might happen that the UF calibration box • Fill the low level tube with water.
does not detect the low level and/or high level • Write down the voltage V HIGH FLUID.
correctly. (The low level lamp in a correct • Connect the volt meter between IC1, pin 4
calibration box should be lit only if there is fluid and Z0VL.
at the low level detector.) • Adjust the voltage to the average of V HIGH
If such problems occur first try to clean the glass AIR and V HIGH FLUID with the
tube at the level detectors. (Use a bottle brush). potentiometer R12.
If this does not help, adjust the potentiometers
R9 and R12 in the UF calibration box, following
the instructions below.
The low level detector:

• Connect a voltmeter between IC1, pin 7and
Z0VL.
• Check that there is no fluid at the low level
detector.
• Write down the voltage V LOW AIR.
• Fill the low level tube with water.
• Write down the voltage V LOW FLUID.
• Connect the volt meter between IC1, pin 6
and Z0VL.
• Adjust the voltage to the average of V LOW
AIR and V LOW FLUID with the
potentiometer R9.
Example:
If V LOW AIR=4.25V and
V LOW FLUID=2.25V,
IC1, pin 6 should have 3.25V.
Connection for UF-measuring unit calibration

Calibration Manual
Calibration, Blood Monitor Venous Pressure Transducer calibration,

BM 3
A/D Converter BM (CPU P), BM 4 Equipment needed: Pressure meter, Calibration
tube kit.
Equipment needed: Digital voltmeter. (Tolerance -700 to -500 mmHg ± 10%
-500 to +500 mmHg ± 5 mmHg or ± 3%
1. Start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S and +500 to +750 mmHg ± 10%)
enter the service menu.
2. Set the display to: 1. Enter the service menu and set the
A/D CONVERTER CPU P AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S display to:
BM (80188) BM4 BM 3, “PRESSURE VENOUS”.
START START
3. Press UF
STOP
to enter calibration routine. 2. Press UF
STOP
to start calibration routine.
4. Measure the voltage between TP 4 and TP 5
on the BM CPU board. (See figure below) 3. Make sure nothing is connected to the trans-
ducer (zero pressure).
TP4 4. Set the “REF SET” value on the display to 0

TP5 TP9
TP7 TP10
mmHg.
TP11
TP17
TP14 TP18 5. Press the lit below “REF SET” and wait
TP12 TP22
TP6
TP13 for the calibration display.
TP8
TP15 6. Connect a Pressure meter (together with a
TP16
calibration tube) to the transducer.
TP21
TP3 E01342007
TP19
TP2 TP20 7. Zeroset the Pressure meter.
1074

5. Set the “REF SET” on the display to the 9. Set the “REF. SET” value on the Blood Moni-
value shown on the voltmeter (min. 48,96 tor display to the same value as shown on the
mV max. 50,88 mV). Pressure meter.
6. Press the lit arrow below “REF SET”.
START
7. Press UF
STOP
to load the value into the 10. Press the lit below “REF SET” and wait
EEPROM. for the calibration display.

To exit: press (will abort calibration

without storing above offset calibration).
13. Set the “REF. SET” value on the Blood Moni-

tor display to the same value as shown on the
Pressur e meter.

Co
nd
uc
m
tiv m
ph
S/c
ity
T
37
ph
¤C
T
25
¤C
START
Sc
rol
15. Press to load the calibration values into

Co /cm
Ca
mS
nd
lib
UF
rat
uc
e
tiv
Te
ity
mp
era
Pr
tur
es
STOP
e
su
re
Tim
er
En
DX
ter
/ Re
se
t
the EEPROM.

Calibration Manual
Arterial Pressure Transducer calibration, BM 2

tube kit. 9. Set the “REF. SET” value on the Blood
Monitor display to the same value that is
(Tolerance: shown on the Pressure meter.
-700 to -500 mmHg ± 10%
-500 to +500 mmHg ± 5 mmHg or ± 3% 10. Press the lit below “REF SET” and
+500 to +750 mmHg ± 10%)
wait for the calibration display.
BM 2, “PRESSURE ARTERIAL”.
START
2. Press UF
STOP
3. Make sure nothing is connected to the trans- without storing above offset calibration).
4. Set the “REF SET” value on the display to
0mmHg. 13. Set the “REF. SET” value on the Blood
Monitor display to the same value as shown
5. Press the lit below “REF SET” and wait on the Pressure meter.
for the calibration display.
6. Connect a Pressure meter (together with a value and wait for the calibration display.
START
7. Zeroset the PRessure meter. 15. Press UF
STOP
the EEPROM.
Co
nd
uc cm
m
tiv
ph
S/
ity
T
37
ph
¤C
T
25
¤C
Sc
roll
Co /cm
Ca
mS
nd
lib
rat
uc
e
tiv
Te
ity
mp
era
Pr
tur
es
e
su
re
Tim
er
En
DX
ter
/ Re
se
t

Calibration Manual
System Pressure Transducer calibration, BM 1

Equipment needed: Pressure meter, Calibration 9. Set the “REF. SET” value on the AK 200 S /
tube kit. AK 200 ULTRA S display to the same value
(Tolerance:
-700 to -500 mmHg ± 10% 10. Press the lit below “REF SET” and
-500 to +500 mmHg ± 5 mmHg or ± 3%
wait for the calibration display.
+500 to +750 mmHg ± 10%)
1. Enter the service menu and set the enter sensitivity calibration.
BM 1, “PRESSURE SYSTEM”.
START
2. Press UF
STOP
3. Make sure nothing is connected to the trans- without storing above offset calibration).
4. Set the “REF SET” value on the display to
0mmHg. 13. Set the “REF. SET” value on the Blood
Monitor displayed to the same value as
5. Press the lit below “REF SET” and wait shown on the Pressure meter.
for the calibration display.
6. Connect a Pressure meter (together with a value and wait for the calibration display.
START
7. Zeroset the Pressure meter. 15. Press UF

STOP
the EEPROM.
Co m
nd
uc
tiv
ph
S/
ity
cm
T
37
ph
¤C
T
25
¤C
Sc
roll
Co cm
Ca
mS/
nd
lib
rate
uc
tiv
Te
ity
mpe
ratu
Pr
es
re
su
re
Tim
er
En
DX
ter
/ Re
se
t

Calibration Manual
Level Detector calibration (Air detector), BM 5
Equipment needed: Drip chamber. Trouble shooting

If the calibration value has not stabilized within
5 minutes, the following error message is dis-
played:
BM 5, “LEVEL DETECTOR”.
CALIBR LEVEL NOT STABLE
START
2. Press UF
STOP
to start calibration routine. ERROR WITHIN 5 MINUTES
3. Insert a filled drip chamber. It is recom- The reason for the error is probably that the drip
mended that both the water and the drip chamber was touched during the calibration.
chamber have a temperature of 37° C. Make Make sure that the drip chamber is correctly
sure that the level detector (Air detector) inserted, that there is no air bubbles in the
and drip chamber are dry and clean. If water and that the temperature is 37 °C. Then
possible, the drip chamber shall be from the repeat the calibration.
same type of bloodline as will be used during
treatment. If the alarm limit is too high or too low, the
following error message is displayed:
4. Press the lit .
CALIBR LOW LEVEL HIGH
5. The calibration is now performed automati- ERROR 14 XX 70
into the EEPROM. If the problem remains, this means that the air
detector transducers are bad. The air detector
6. The calibration result is displayed: must be replaced.
READY LEVEL TRANSMIT If the verification of the calibration fails, the

XX YYY Confirm following error message is displayed:
The value under LEVEL is the new alarm limit, CALIBR COMP LEVEL
which shall be between 14 and 70. ERROR VERIFICATION FAILED
The value under TRANSMIT is the transmission The reason for the error is probably that the drip
level, which is normally 255 but can also be 160, chamber was touched during the calibration.
if the air detector transducers are exceptionally If the problem remains, some circuit is broken
good. on the BM CPU board.

Calibration Manual
Priming Detector calibration, BM 6 Blood Volume Sensor - BVS

Equipment needed: Reference tube.
NOTE!
1. Enter the service menu and set the Calibration of the BVS-unit can’t be done in the
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S display to: field. If necessary, replace the complete BVS-
BM 6, “PRIMING DETECTOR” unit.
START The self test of the BVS has to be performed on

2. Press UF to start calibration routine.
STOP
an empty cuvette holder, therefore the cuvette has
to be outside the holder until the function check for
3. INSERT EMPTY REFERENCE TUBE the blood monitor has been completed (Priming
Press SET key when ready button is flashing).
4. The calibration is now performed automati-

into the EEPROM.
5. The calibration value is now shown on the

info. display.
6. READY BLOOD LEVEL

XX Confirm
7. Press the lit to confirm.
Note! If an error comes during calibration of the

priming detector, please refere to the Error
Message List, HCEN9313.

Calibration Manual
Temperature BM CPU Board calibration, Occlusion adjustment, blood pump/

BM 0 infusion pump
Equipment needed: Temperature meter. Equipment needed: Adjustment kit for blood
pump rollers.
1. Place the Blood Monitor in service position.
Insert a gauge pin (with the same diameter as
2.* Make sure AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S has the double wall thickness of the pump segment
been switched off for at least 30 minutes multiplied by 0,7), between one of the pressure
without beeing moved (to asure room rollers of the blood pump rotor and the pump
temperature on the main BM CPU board). path without using force.
3. Start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S, A kit for adjustment of blood pump rollers,
enter the service menu and set the including three different gauge pins is available.
BM 0, “TEMP BM CPU BOARD”. Note! Check the distance between the pressure
roller and the blood pump path. It must not be
more than the diameter of the gauge pin in the
4. Press to enter the calibration routine.
measuring range of the blood pump path.
5. Read the room temperature on a Tempera- If necessary adjust the adjustment screw and
ture meter and set the “REF SET” value on check again.
the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S display to
the same value.
6. Press the lit below “REF SET” and

wait for the calibration display return.
START
7. Press UF
STOP
the EEPROM.
* Make sure the ref. instrument transducer

has been in room temperature for at least
30 minutes.
= Measuring range

Calibration Manual
BPM-test
Equipment needed: BPM test equipment, is airtight.

Pressure meter, Calibration tube kit. - Inflation speed test: measures the time to fill
the cuff with air.
The functionality of the blood pressure module, - Deflation speed: measures the speed of air
BPM, is described in chapter 5, Technical de- release from the cuff
scription. - Static pressure: Check of pressure transducer
calibration
The maintenance to be carried out for the mod-
ule is to check the accuracy for the pressure Each of the tests can be carried out separately
transducers, to check the air leakage, to check but the above order for carrying out the sub-tests
the inflation speed and to check the deflation is recommended.
speed.
Check that the results from the sub-tests not
By entering the service menu it is possible to exceed following limits:
perform a check of the BPM device to determine - Air leakage: maximum 18 mmHg/ 3 min
if it works correctly. - Inflation speed: 2 -7 s
- Deflation speed: 4 - 6 mmHg/s
It is recommended to perform the test at least - Static pressure: Maximum deviation from
every 12 months or after a repair/exchange of reference to be within ± 3 mm Hg.
the BPM. 50 ± 3 mmHg
150 ± 3 mmHg
250 ± 3 mmHg
Test method:
1. Attach cuff no. 3 tight to the BPM test Check of air leakage
equipment, according to the illustrations
below: By entering this test mode the air leakage for
2. Start the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S with the the BPM module, cuff hose and cuff will be tested
main switch and the ON/OFF button. automatically. Before entering the test mode cuff
3. Enter Service mode. no. 3 and cuff hose no. 1 to be connected to the
4. Enter Diagnostics mode. AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S. Cuff no. 3 to be
5. Select BM, Others, BPM wrapped tight to the BPM test equipment.
BPM test equipment is used to simulate the

BPM sub-tests patient arm circumference. The air leakage is
In the BPM service menu the following four sub- tested for 3 minutes. If the displayed value is
tests are included: above 18 mm Hg / 3 minutes, this indicates that
there is a possible air leakage in the system.
- Air leakage test: measures that the equipment
23~33cm
CUFF No. (12cm)
12cm

Calibration Manual
It is of course also possible to perform this test

without the cuff and cuff hose connected but then and external pressure of 250, 150, 50 mm Hg to
the test will only check for air leakage within the be applied. Check deviation from reference
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S. In this case replace pressure instrument for displayed value.
the cuff and cuff hose by a tube, which is closed.
Note: There is no over pressure protection in
the Service mode, so be aware of not to apply a
Check of inflation speed too high pressure during the Static pressure test,
By entering this test mode the capacity for the which can damage the membrane of the pressure
pump within the module will be tested automati- transducer.
cally. Before entering the test mode cuff no. 3
and cuff hose no. 1 to be connected to the Trouble shooting:
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S.
If the value from the air leakage test is above 18
Cuff no. 3 to be wrapped tight to the BPM test mmHg/ 3 minutes, it indicates an air leakage in
equipment. If the displayed time is above 7 the BPM system. First check for any air leakage
seconds, this test indicates that the pump is on the cuff, cuff hose or the connectors. If the air
worn-out. leakage does not come from the cuff, cuff hose or
the connectors it indicates that the valves inside
the BPM module are leaking. The BPM must
Check of deflation speed then be replaced.
By entering this test mode the functionality of
the valves within the module will be tested If the result from the inflation speed test exceeds
automatically. Before entering the test mode cuff the limit, first check for any air leakage in the
no. 3 and cuff hose no. 1 to be connected to the BPM system. A high value indicates that the
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S. Cuff no. 3 to be pump capacity in the BPM is too low and there-
wrapped tight to the BPM test equipment. fore the BPM must be replaced.
If the displayed value is below 4 mm Hg/second If the result from the inflation speed test is
this test indicates that there is a change in the below the limit, check that the cuff hose is not
restriction for the valves affecting the time for kinked or squeezed and that cuff no. 3 is con-
the air within cuff and cuff hose to be let out. nected.
Check of pressure transducer calibra- If the result from the deflation speed test is
below the limit, check that the cuff hose is
tion, static pressure and over pressure
correctly connected to the cuff and that the tube
protection is not kinked or squeezed.
By entering this test mode it will be possible to Otherwise the failure is caused by the BPM and
check the actual pressure value for the BPM it must be replaced.
pressure on the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S
display.
Before entering the test mode, pressure trans-

ducer calibration tube kit to be connected to the
BPM connector on the rear of the AK 200 S /
AK 200 ULTRA S. No cuff and cuff hose to be
connected.
Note! The pressure transducer calibration tube

kit must be drained before being connected; to
make sure that no fluids or particles enters the
BPM connector or tubing’s.
Enter the static pressure test. When “Current

pressure” is displayed it is possible to start
applying external reference pressure.
To check the actual pressure valve, external

pressure reference instrument to be connected

Calibration Manual
Logging after calibration

When calibration has been performed, it is recom-
mended to log the values shown in table on
page 38.
Select internal (see chapter Service Technicians

Guide, Logging) or external logging.
To run GXL-logging, the following facilities must

be available and connected as shown in fig:
P63 black
D-SUB 9 pole alt.

D-SUB 25 pole
GXL-logging program
Procedure:
• Start the system and wait until the
AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S has performed
Fch and the first self calibration.
• Volume Control mode
• Let the AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S run for
at least 45 minutes, bypass off.
• Select suitable mode: BiCart, Acetate or
Liquid Bicarbonate.
• Set temperature value: 37.0 °C.
• Start the GXL-program on the PC.

Calibration Manual
Modem connection
P63 black

Calibration Manual
Logging values
Conductivity values correspond to the preset concentrate and set values. See page 2:55. The table is
valid for a main flow of 500 ml/min.
Array Value BiCart Acetate Liquid Bicarbonate

SRI 89 Heat rods duty cycle X.XX % < 30.00% < 30.00% < 30.00%
SRI 14 Temperature vessel X.XX °C 37.50 +/-0.50 37.50 +/-0.50 37.80 +/-0.50
SRI 15 Temperature cell A control X.XX °C 37.20 +/-0.50 37.40 +/-0.50 37.40 +/-0.50
SRI 116 Temperature cell A PRS X.XX °C 37.20 +/-0.50 37.40 +/-0.50 37.40 +/-0.50
SRI 16 Temperature cell B PRS X.XX °C 37.00 +/-0.50 37.00 +/-0.50 37.00 +/-0.50
SRI 115 Temperature cell B control X.XX °C 37.00 +/-0.50 37.00 +/-0.50 37.00 +/-0.50
SRI 13 Conductivity cell A control X.XX mS/cm **12.30 +/-0.50**** 0 +/-0.50**** *9.50 +/-0.50****
SRI 114 Conductivity cell A PRS X.XX mS/cm **12.30 +/-0.50**** 0 +/-0.50**** *9.50 +/-0.50****
SRI 12 Conductivity cell B control X.XX mS/cm **14.30 +/-0.50**** **14.00 +/-0.50**** **14.30 +/-0.50****
SRI 11 Conductivity cell B PRS X.XX mS/cm **14.30 +/-0.50**** **14.00 +/-0.50**** **14.30 +/-0.50****
SRI 8 Degassing pressure X.X mm Hg **-580.0 +/-20.0 **-630.0 +/-20.0 **-580.0 +/-20.0
SRI 10 Flow out pressure X.X mm Hg -175.0 +/-40.0 -175.0 +/-40.0 -175.0 +/-40.0
SRI 6 HPG pressure X.X mm Hg ***-95 +/-25.0 ***-95 +/-25.0 ***-95 +/-25.0
SRI 7 SAG pressure X.X mm Hg -120 +/-50.0 -120 +/-50.0 -120 +/-50.0
SRI 4 PD pressure X.X mm Hg -125 +/-15.0 -125 +/-15.0 -125 +/-15.0
SRI 9 Flow in pressure X.X mm Hg +175 +/-50.0 +175.0 +/-50.0 +175.0 +/-50.0
SRI 71 A-pump deviation X.X % < +/-5.0% < +/-5.0%
SRI 72 B-pump deviation X.X % < +/-5.0% < +/-5.0%
SRI 73 Ac-pump deviation X.X % < +/-5.0%
SRI 97 Degassing pump duty cycle X.X % <75.0 % <70.0 % <70.0 %
SRI 31 Flow out pump duty cycle X.X % <50.0 % <50.0 % <50.0 %
SRI 35 Flow in pump duty cycle X.X % <50.0 % <50.0 % <50.0 %
SRI 0 System pressure X.X mm Hg 0.0 +/- 5.0 0.0 +/- 5.0 0.0 +/- 50
SRI 1 Venous pressure X.X mm Hg 0.0 +/- 5.0 0.0 +/- 5.0 0.0 +/- 5.0
SRI 82 Arterial pressure X.X mm Hg 0.0 +/- 5.0 0.0 +/- 5.0 0.0 +/- 5.0
SRI 24 Bloodleak detector value X 0 +/- 10 0 +/- 10 0 +/- 10
SRI 25 Flow rate channel 1 X.X ml/min 500 +/- 1 % 500 +/- 1 % 500 +/- 1 %
SRI 26 Flow rate channel 2 X.X ml/min 500 +/- 3 % 500 +/- 3 % 500 +/- 3 %
SRB 0 Level det. transmit level 255 or 160 X X X
SRB 89 Level det. comparation level min.14, max 70 X X X
SRB 2 Priming detector low level 0 - 255 X X X
* Default liquid concentrate

** Presettable
*** Depending on pressure drop in ultrafilter (ULTRA or UFD)
**** Maximum difference between cell A&B = 0,3 mS/cm. Maximum difference within a cell is 0,2
mS/cm

Electrical Safety Inspections
for AK-machines
Including following sub-tests:
- Visual inspection
- PET - Protective earth test
- ELT - Earth leakage current test
- PLT - Patient leakage current test
HCEN12190 Rev 05.2006 Electrical Safety Inspections for AK-machines 11:1

1 General information
To ensure proper operation, a qualified service technician must per-
form an Electrical Safety Inspection (ESI) of the AK-machine at reg-
ular intervals. The information needed to perform ESI is provided in
this manual.
Included in the ESI procedures are checks to verify normal machine
operation. Should the machine fail to pass any of these sub-tests, repair
or calibration might be needed, then repeat the tests until the specifica-
tions are met.
Following sub-tests are included in the ESI of the AK-machines:
- Visual inspection
- PET - Protective earth test
- ELT - Earth leakage current test
- PLT - Patient leakage current test
During the visual inspection of the equipment, the service engineer
shall look for potetial faults related to the electrical safety of the
machine.
The purpose of the PET test is to verify that the protective earthed parts
of the machine are properly connected to protective earth, providing a
safe low electrical potential on these in case of insulation failure.
The purposes of the ELT/PLT tests are to verify that non-functional
leakage currents to operator and patient are within safe limits.
ESI should be performed at every maintenance service (Base-service)
but also after replacements of some components in the AK-machine
according to the Service Manual, Chapter Replacements.
When performing the ESI, which requires access to the interior of the
machine, you must have proper electrostatic safety devices (i.e. wrist
grounding straps or grounding mats) in place to prevent damage to
electrostatic sensitive components within the machine.
During repair of any of the parts in the flow path, special care should
be taken and a good hygiene should be kept.
Checklists for each sub-test are included in the end of this manual. The
purpose of these checklists is to record the work done and to trend the
readings from the ELT/PLT- tests.
11:2 Electrical Safety Inspections for AK-machines HCEN12190 Rev 05.2006

2 Visual inspection
The visual inspection is an important part of the electrical safety
inspections of the AK-machine.
The visual inspection is a procedure to make sure that the medical
equipment in use still confirms the specifications and has not suffered
from any external damage and/or contamination.
The visual inspection includes following steps:
1. Exterior parts including covers: look for major damages, cracks
etc.
2. Cablings: look for cuts, wrong connections etc.
3. Fuse rating: check correct values after replacement.
4. Markings and labeling: check the integrity
5. Integrity of mechanical parts: check for any visual obstructions

3 PET - Protective Earth Test
NOTE
The machine shall not be connected to mains power during this test.
3.1 Test equipment for PET-test
Digital Multimeter:
Manufacturer: e.g. Fluke
Resistance: accuracy ± 0.5 %
3.2 PET for AK 95 / AK 95 S

1. Check that the resistance between the grounding clips of the
mains plug and the exterior cover of the power supply is
< 0.3 Ohm.
mains plug and the heater rod is < 0.3 Ohm.

mains plug and the suction pump is < 0.3 Ohm.

mains plug and the mounting plate to the diascan conductivity
cell is < 0.3 Ohm.

mains plug and the stand of MM 95 (e.g. a screw to the heat
exchangers) is < 0.3 Ohm.

mains plug and the front of MM 95 (e.g. a screw to the BiCart-
holder) is < 0.3 Ohm.

mains plug and the heparin pump (rear plate) is < 0.3 Ohm.

mains plug and the potential equalization connector is
< 0.3 Ohm.

3.3 PET for AK 200 / AK 200 ULTRA / AK 200 S /
AK 200 ULTRA S
mains plug and the power supply (right side, through the vent-
holes of the bottom box) is < 0.3 Ohm.
mains plug and the FM bottom plate is < 0.3 Ohm.
mains plug and the heater rods outside the heating vessel is <0.3
Ohm.
For 115 V machines: Also check that the resistance between the
grounding clips of the mains plug for the heater rods and the
heater rods outside the heating vessel is < 0.3 Ohm.
mains plug and the overheat protection of the heater rods is
< 0.3 Ohm.
mains plug and the potential equalization connector is
< 0.3 Ohm.

mains plug and the heparin pump (rear plate) is < 0.3 Ohm.
Note! Don’t measure on the cable clip or its binding screw.

mains plug and the rear plate of the BVS-unit is < 0.3 Ohm.

4 ELT / PLT
4.1 Test equipment
Safety tester:
According to IEC 60601-1
Suggested Manufacturer: Metron, Rigel, Biotec
4.2 General conditions for ELT / PLT

1. The AK-monitor shall be connected to both feed water and drain.
2. Connect the AK-monitor to the outlet supply of the safety tester.
Use a mains plug adapter for respective mains plug. If the AK-
machine is equipped with two mains plugs, the measurements
shall be performed for each mains plug and the values shall be
added.
Safety
tester
Feed water AK-machine
mains prot. earth leakage current
earth enclosure
leakage current 230 VAC

alternative direct differential alternative
equipment patient
patient leakage current
Drain
lead to GND lead to lead AC/DC lead ISO
outlet power
Inlet Power
open E. open N. ev. M.
Mains voltage to
the AK-machine
3. Central concentrate delivery systems should not be used. Use

either liquid or non-liquid concentrates.
4. No other external equipment than specified in this instruction
should be connected to the machine.
5. The protective earth of the machine must not be in contact with
any external protective earth.

4.3 ELT - Earth Leakage Current Test
2. Measure the earth leakage current with the safety tester.
3. Take the highest reading when the machine is running.
4. Invert the phases of the mains voltage. The machine might
restart.
5. Take the highest reading when the machine is running.
6. Check that the highest measured readings don’t exceed the limit
values in following table:
Limit values for ELT

AK 95 S (100V) Max 500 µA
Typical < 100 µA
AK 95 S (110V) Max 500 µA
Typical < 125 µA
AK 200 S (115V)* Max 500 µA
Typical < 100 µA
AK 200 ULTRA S (115V)* Max 500 µA
Typical < 100 µA
AK 95 S (230V) Max 500 µA
Typical < 200 µA
AK 200 S (230V) Max 500 µA
Typical < 145 µA
AK 200 ULTRA S (230V) Max 500 µA
Typical < 145 µA
*The total earth leakage current is the sum of the readings from both
mains cables (to the heater rods and to the ACDC).

4.4 PLT - Patient Earth Leakage Current Test
NOTE
Make sure that the machine does not perform a taration (self calibration)
during the measurements.

2. The safety couplings of the dialysis fluid tubes shall be con-
nected to the safety tester via an accesspoint.
Patient
leakage
current Safety
Dialysis fluid tubes tester
AK-machine
mains prot. earth leakage current
earth enclosure
230 VAC
Access-
leakage current
alternative direct differential alternative

equipment patient
patient leakage current
point lead to GND lead to lead
Inlet Power
AC/DC lead ISO
outlet power
open E. open N. ev. M.
Dialysis fluid tubes
Mains voltage to
the AK-machine
Note! There must be a main flow during this test. Check that the
Bypass button is switched off.
3. Measure the patient leakage current with the safety tester.

4. Take the highest AC-reading when the machine is running.
5. Take the highest DC-reading when the machine is running.
6. Invert the phases of the mains voltage. The machine might
restart.
7. Take the highest AC-reading when the machine is running.
8. Take the highest DC-reading when the machine is running.
9. Check that the highest measured readings don’t exceed the limit
values in following table:
Limit values for PLT

AC DC
AK 95 S (100V) Max 100µA Max 10µA
Typical <10µA
Typical <10µA
Typical <10µA
AK 200 ULTRA S (115V) Max 100µA Max 10µA
Typical <10µA
Typical <10µA
Typical <10µA
AK 200 ULTRA S (230V) Max 100µA Max 10µA
Typical <10µA

NOTE
For treatments with a central venous catheter (CVC), the patient leakage
current must be < 10µA


5 Checklist
Electrical Safety Inspection for AK machines
- to be filed by the Service Engineer responsible
AK 95 / AK 95 S
AK 200 / AK 200 ULTRA / AK 200 S / AK 200 ULTRA S
Equipment ID:_______________Serial number:__________________

Run time (h):__________
Visual inspection
Visual inspection of the AK-machine according to section 2.
PET for AK 95, AK 95 S

(1) Resistance between the grounding clips of the mains plug and the exterior
cover of the power supply is < 0.3 Ohm.
(2) Resistance between the grounding clips of the mains plug and the heater
rod is < 0.3 Ohm.
(3) Resistance between the grounding clips of the mains plug and the suction
pump is < 0.3 Ohm.
(4) Resistance between the grounding clips of the mains plug and the mount-
ing plate to the diascan conductivity cell is < 0.3 Ohm.
(5) Resistance between the grounding clips of the mains plug and the stand
of MM 95 (e.g. a screw to the heat exchangers) is < 0.3 Ohm.
(6) Resistance between the grounding clips of the mains plug and the front
of MM 95 (e.g. a screw to the BiCart-holder)
(7) Resistance between the grounding clips of the mains plug and the heparin
pump (rear plate) is < 0.3 Ohm.
(8) Resistance between the grounding clips of the mains plug and the poten-
tial equalization connector is < 0.3 Ohm.
PET for AK 200, AK 200 ULTRA, AK 200 S, AK 200 ULTRA S

(1) Resistance between the grounding clips of the mains plug and the power
supply (right side, through the ventholes of the bottom box) is < 0.3 Ohm.
(2) Resistance between the grounding clips of the mains plug and the FM
bottom plate is < 0.3 Ohm.
(3) Resistance between the grounding clips of the mains plug and the heater
rods outside the heating vessel is <0.3 Ohm.
(4) For 115 V machines: Resistance between the grounding clips of the
mains plug for the heater rods and the heater rods outside the heating vessel
is < 0.3 Ohm.
(5) Resistance between the grounding clips of the mains plug and the over-
heat protection of the heater rods is < 0.3 Ohm.
(6) Resistance between the grounding clips of the mains plug and the poten-
tial equalization connector is < 0.3 Ohm.
(7) Resistance between the grounding clips of the mains plug and the heparin
pump (rear plate) is < 0.3 Ohm.
(8) Resistance between the grounding clips of the mains plug and the rear
plate of the BVS-unit is < 0.3 Ohm.

ELT - Earth Leakage Current Test
File the highest earth leakage current value when the machine is running
according to section 4.3:
Earth leakage current value: _______ µA
Note!
Check that the highest measured readings don’t exceed the limit values
described in section 4:3
PLT - Patient Earth Leakage Current Test
File both the highest AC-reading and the highest DC-reading when the
machine is running according to section 4.4:
AC-reading: _______ µA
DC-reading: _______ µA
Note!
Check that the highest measured readings don’t exceed the limit values
described in section 4:4
Date:__________________________
Signature:_______________________
Other comments:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________

AK 200 S Flow path

P
Heat Filter
Ex-
changer
T T
Cond T P
pH-sensor
Non- cell A
Degassing
return
valve pump P T
LDVA
Control pump Cond
Level
Select
HCEN10398 © 2006.05. Gambro Lundia AB. Rev. 05.2006

Protective pump
Non- Select Bag PBVA C T
return
Pressure Filter
P
output output
Filter
BiCart
TPVA ZEVA
Filter BiCart
Blood leak
pressure P T
Cond
Flow input cell C
Deairating 2 1
Restrictor pump
inlet P
SAG Safety HPG
Drain P by-pass
BYVA
unit
DIVA
Pure water
A concentrate
B concentrate
Dialysis fluid
Dialysate
AK 200 S UFD Flow path

P
Heat Filter
Ex-
changer
T T
Cond T P
pH-sensor
Non- cell A
Degassing
return
valve pump P T
LDVA
Control pump Cond
Level
Select
10395 © 2006.05. Gambro Lundia AB. Rev. 05.2006

Protective pump
return
Pressure Filter
P
output output
Filter
BiCart
TPVA ZEVA
Filter BiCart
Blood leak
pressure P T
Cond
Flow input cell C
Deairating 2 1
HCEN10398
Restrictor pump
inlet P
SAG Safety HPG
FIVA Dialysis fluid
Drain P by-pass
filter BYVA
unit
U8000S DIVA
Pure water
A concentrate
B concentrate
Dialysis fluid
Dialysate
Ch12_3_FM_flow diagram.pdf 2006-07-11 11:56:02
AK 200 ULTRA
S S Flow path
Water filter U8000S Mixing Degassing Degassing
FLVA Heating Over Flow chamber DRVA pressure chamber with
P
Flow Filter PAVA C P M restrictor
restr- Heat Filter
ictor Ex-
changer
T T
Cond T P
pH-sensor
Non- cell A
Non- Degassing
return
return valve pump P
LDVA T
valve Control pump
Level Cond
Select
8 © 2006.05. Gambro Lundia AB. Rev. 05.2006

Protective pump
return
C
Pressure Filter
M P
output output
Filter
Feeding pump B
Y
BCVA pump pressure

CM
Bi Ca r t
MY
TPVA ZEVA
CY
Filter BiCart
Blood leak
CMY
K
pressure P T
Cond
Flow input cell C
Deairating 2 1
HCEN10399
Restrictor pump
inlet P
SAG Safety CWVA HPG
Pressure Dialysis fluid
Drain P by-pass
HDVA regulator filter BYVA
unit
FIVA Infusion DIVA

Pure water port U8000S
A concentrate
B concentrate
Dialysis fluid
Dialysate

Ak 200s

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Ak 200s

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

AK 200 S

A better way to better care

Chapter 1 Installation guide

Chapter 2 Maintenance manual

Chapter 4 Service technician’s guide

Chapter 5 Technical description

Chapter 6 Technical data

Chapter 7 Spare parts list

Chapter 8 Wiring diagram

Chapter 9 Symbol description

Chapter 10 Calibration manual

Chapter 11 Electrical safety inspections

Chapter 12 FM flow diagrams

About this manual requirements; and if the equipment is used in

Complaint 1. Practical experience of the AK 200 S

Disclaimer 5. Access to and understanding of the

Publication no. Denomination

The complete AK 200 S Service Manual,

HCEN9282 Rev. 07. 2005 Installation Guide

All rights reserved.

Positioning the dialysis machine

Installation instructions for AK 200 S

Installation instructions for AK 200 ULTRA S

Unpacking and inspection Environment and Physical

pH-kit Ambient temperature: +18 °C to + 35 °C

Transport and Storage Environment

Ambient temperature: -20 °C to +70 °C

Note: During transportation and storage the

Dialyzerholder Physical Data

1:2 AK 200 S & AK 200 ULTRA S Installation Guide

Mains Voltage and Power Mains Water Supply

Connector: Certified to IEC 320/ for AK 200 ULTRA S

Tools Back-up Battery

NOTE! This battery must be connected during

A discharged battery will be charged with maxi-

Warning! LOW BATTERY

1:4 AK 200 S & AK 200 ULTRA S Installation Guide

Assembling the Monitor Stand

The monitor stand MS 200 or MS 202 • Infusion stand holders.

AK 200 S & AK 200 ULTRA S Installation Guide 1:5

Assembling the Monitor Stand

3 1. Place the lower frame of the stand upside-

2. Attach the grounding sign beside the earth

4 4. Thread both the earth cable and the battery

1. Adjust the height of the MS 200. Select the

MS 200 can be adjusted in five different

2. Turn the pillar (stand leg) upside-down.

1:6 AK 200 S & AK 200 ULTRA S Installation Guide

1. Place the lower frame (cover included) on the

1. Fasten the lower frame (cover included) to

AK 200 S & AK 200 ULTRA S Installation Guide 1:7

1. Assemble the battery-backup kit (K18652001)

3. Strap the battery cable to the bar.

4. Insert the sealing grommet in the opening of

1:8 AK 200 S & AK 200 ULTRA S Installation Guide

2 2. Fasten the bracket for the dialysis fluid filter

The right filter holder is used for dialysis

The left filter holder is used for Water-

AK 200 ULTRA S only:

AK 200 S & AK 200 ULTRA S Installation Guide 1:9

Assembling the Monitor Stand

1. Place the lower frame of the stand

2. Attach the grounding sign beside the earth

3. Assemble the earth cable to the earth screw.